4 Piping Input Reference

SECTION 4
Piping Input Reference

This section describes how to specify job parameters through the menus, boxes, and
commands of the software.
To edit a piping model, open a piping file from the CAESAR II main menu. Then, click Input >
Piping. The CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box displays.
This dialog box describes the piping on an element-by-element basis. It consists of menus and
toolbars which perform a number of supporting operations, and data fields that contain
information about each piping element. A graphic representation of the model displays
automatically. This model updates as you add new elements.
CAESAR II User's Guide 106

In This Section
Classic Piping Input Dialog Box................................................... 107
Available Commands .................................................................. 229
3D Modeler ................................................................................. 372
S3D/SPR Model View ................................................................. 390
Classic Piping Input Dialog Box

Piping data is grouped into blocks of related data on the left side of the Classic Piping Input.
Double click >> in the upper right corner of any group to display additional input boxes in a
dialog box. You can arrange these dialog boxes to meet your needs.
The right side of the piping input includes an auxiliary panel with tabs that relate to items
selected through the check boxes. You can also access these tabs by selecting the auxiliary
area in the Aux Tools Toolbar (Piping Input) (see "Aux Tools Toolbar" on page 357).

Navigating the Classic Piping Input Dialog Box using the

Function Keys
Function keys help you to quickly type data without using the mouse to move to various input
boxes. By default, when you place the cursor inside a box on the Classic Piping Input dialog
box, pressing a function key on the keyboard moves the cursor to the beginning of a block of
input data according to the list below.
Function Key Destination
F2 From Node
F3 DX
F4 Diameter
F5 Temp 1
F6 Material
F7 Elastic Modulus (c)
F8 Refractory Thickness
F9 Line number
Help Screens and Units

Press the question mark key ? or the F1 function key while the cursor is in any of the input data
cells to display interactive help text for that item. Hover the cursor over a box to display a tool tip
indicating the current units.
Node Numbers
Each element is identified by its end node number. Because each input screen represents a
piping element, you must specify the element end points, called the From node and the To
node. The software uses these points as locations at which you can type or extract information.
You must specify a From and To node for all elements.
You can set the Auto Node Number Increment configuration setting in Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu and CAESAR II generates the From and To node values
automatically (to a value other than zero) based on the increment you specify.

Double-click >> to display the Edit Node Numbers dialog box.
From
Specifies the node number for the starting end of the element. Node numbers must be
numeric, ranging from 1 to 32000. Typically, the From node number is automatically
generated by CAESAR II from the preceding element. You can change the node numbers,
but be careful not to use the same node number more than once in a model.
To
Specifies the node number for the end of the element. Node numbers must be numeric,
ranging from 1 to 32000. You can change the node numbers, but be careful not to use the
same node number more than once in a model.
Name
Assigns non-numeric names to node points. Double-click the Name check box to display an
auxiliary dialog box where you can assign names of up to 10 characters to the From and To
nodes. These names display with (or instead) of the node numbers in graphic plots and
reports. In Piping Input, click the down arrow on Node Numbers (in the Plot Tools
toolbar) and select Names Only to display only the node names on the model, and not node
numbers.
Non-numeric names can be truncated in 80-column reports.

Deltas
Type element lengths as delta dimensions according to the X, Y, and Z rectangular coordinate
system established for the piping system. The Y-axis represents the vertical axis in CAESAR II.
CAESAR II treats each element as a vector. The vector length is equal to the element length.
The vector direction points from the From node to the To node.
The delta dimensions DX, DY, and DZ, are the measurements along the X, Y, and Z-axes
between the From node and the To node. In most cases you only need to use one of the three
options, because the piping usually runs along the global axes. Where the piping element is
skewed, you must make two or three entries. You must define at least one option for all
elements except zero-length expansion joints.
When you are using feet and inches for compound length and length units, valid entries
include formats such as: 3-6, 3 ft. -6 in, and 3-6-3/16.
You can use offsets to modify the stiffness of the current element by adjusting its length and the
orientation of its neutral axis in 3-D space.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Deltas dialog box.
DX
Specifies the X component of the element.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch -
fraction or meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use
simple forms of addition, multiplication, and division, as well as exponential format.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this field.

DY
Specifies the Y component of the element.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch - fraction or
meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use simple forms of
addition, multiplication, and division, as well as exponential format.
DZ
Specifies the Z component of the element.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch - fraction or
meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use simple forms of
addition, multiplication, and division, as well as exponential format.
Offsets
Indicates whether the software corrects modeled dimensions of an element back to its
actual dimensions. Double-click the Offsets check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog
box to select or clear this option.
Specify the distances from the position of the From node in 3-D space to the actual From
end of the element.
Specify the distances from the position of the To node in 3-D space to the actual To end of
the element.
If you leave any offset direction distances blank, the software defaults them to zero.
Thermal expansion is 0 for the offset portion of an offset element. No element flexibility is
generated for the offset portion of the element. The following figure shows a common usage
for the offset element.

Length
Specifies the distance between the To node and the From node.
Direction Cosines
Specifies the X, Y, and Z components or element direction cosines.
For an element aligned with the X-axis,
Cos X ..... 1.0
Cos Y ..... <Blank>
Cos Z ..... <Blank>
For an element aligned with the Y-axis,
Cos X ..... <Blank>
Cos Y ..... 1.0
Cos Z ..... <Blank>
For an element aligned with the Z-axis,
Cos X ..... <Blank>
Cos Y ..... <Blank>
Cos Z ..... 1.0

Pipe Sizes
Type the dimensions for the element. Plus mill tolerance is used only for the IGE/TD/12 piping
code. Seam weld is used only for the IGE/TD/12 piping code. These options carry forward from
one element to the next during the design session so you only need to type values for those
elements at which a change occurs. You can specify nominal pipe sizes and schedules.
CAESAR II converts these values to actual outside diameter and wall thickness. Outside
diameter and wall thickness are required data inputs.
Nominal diameters, thicknesses, and schedule numbers are a function of the pipe size
specification. Click Tools > Configure/Setup on the main menu or click CAESAR II
Configuration on the CAESAR II Tools toolbar to select ANSI, JIS, or DIN as the piping
size specification.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box.
Diameter
Specifies the pipe diameter. Normally, you should type the nominal diameter and CAESAR
II converts it to the actual outer diameter necessary for the analysis. There are two ways to
prevent this conversion:
Use a modified UNITS file with the Nominal Pipe Schedules turned off,
Specify diameters whose values are off slightly from a nominal size (in English units
the tolerance on diameter is 0.063 in.).
Use F1 to obtain additional information and the current units for this input box. Available
nominal diameters are determined by the active pipe size specification, set by the
configuration software. The following are the available nominal diameters.
ANSI Nominal Pipe ODs, in inches (file ap.bin)
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 42
JIS Nominal Pipe ODs, in millimeters (file jp.bin)
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 90 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650

DIN Nominal Pipe ODs, in millimeters (file dp.bin)

15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200
Wt/Sch
Specifies the thickness of the pipe. Normal input consists of a schedule indicator (such as S,
XS, or 40), which is converted to the proper wall thickness by CAESAR II. If actual thickness
is entered, CAESAR II accepts it as entered. Available schedule indicators are determined
by the active piping specification, set by the configuration software.
ANSI B36.10 Steel Nominal Wall Thickness Designation:
S - Standard
XS - Extra Strong
XXS - Double Extra Strong
ANSI B36.10 Steel Pipe Numbers:
10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
ANSI B36.19 Stainless Steel Schedules:
5S 10S 40S 80S
JIS Pipe Schedules
1990 Steel Schedules:
10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
1990 Stainless Steel Schedules:
5S 10S 40S
DIN Pipe Schedules
None
Only the s (standard) schedule applies to wall thickness calculations for DIN.
Seam Welded
Indicates whether the piping element is seam welded
B31.1 / B31.3
If the B31.1 or B31.3 piping codes are active, select the Seam-welded check box to activate
the Wl box. Wl (the weld strength reduction factor) is used by the software to determine the
minimum wall thickness of the element.
IGE/TD/12
If the IGE/TD/12 piping code is active, select the Seam welded check box when straight
pipes are seam welded. This option affects the stress intensification factor calculations for
that pipe section due to seam welded fabrication.

WI Factor
Specifies the WI factor.
+Mill Tol %; Wl
Specifies the positive mill tolerance. This option is only enabled when IGE/TD/12 is active. It
is used when the Base Stress/Flexibility On option of the Special Execution Options is
set to Plus Mill Tolerance. In that case, piping stiffness and section modulus is based on
the nominal wall thickness increased by this percentage. You can change this value on an
element-by-element basis.
If the B31.3 piping code is activated, this box specifies the weld strength reduction factor
(W l), to be used in the minimum wall calculation for straight pipe.
-Mill Tol %
Displays the negative mill tolerance. This value is read from the configuration file and used
in minimum wall thickness calculations. Also, for IGE/TD/12, this value is used when the
Base Stress/Flexibility On option of the Special Execution Options is set to Plus Mill
Tolerance. In that case, piping stiffness and section modulus is based on the nominal wall
thickness, decreased by this percentage. You can change this value on an
element-by-element basis.
Corrosion
Specifies the corrosion allowance used to calculate a reduced section modulus. There is a
configuration option available to consider all stress cases as corroded. For more
information, see All Cases Corroded (on page 97).
Pipe Density
Displays the pipe density value. The appropriate pipe density is filled in automatically when
you provide a proper material number. You can override this value at any time. The software
then duplicates the value through the rest of the input.

Fluid Density
Displays the fluid density. Specify the fluid density when the internal fluid the piping system
transports significantly affects the weight loads. When the specific gravity of the fluid is
known, you can type that instead of the density. For example, you could type 0.85SG.
Specific gravities are converted to the appropriate densities immediately on input. To type
specific gravity, follow the numeric value with the letters SG (no spaces). The software
automatically converts this value to density.
In the default ENGLISH units system, densities are typed in pounds per cubic inch.
Propagate Properties
Indicates whether to propagate the property changes. Clear this check box to indicate that
properties apply to the current element only.
Operating Conditions
You can specify up to nine temperatures and ten pressures (one extra for the hydrostatic test
pressure) for each piping element. The temperatures are actual temperatures, not changes from
the ambient temperature. CAESAR II uses these temperatures to obtain the thermal strain and
allowable stresses for the element from the Material Database. As an alternative, you can
directly specify the thermal strains. For more information, see Alpha Tolerance (on page 53).
Thermal strains have absolute values on the order of 0.002, and are unitless. Pressures are
typed as gauge values and cannot be negative. Each temperature and each pressure that you
typed creates a loading for you to use when building load cases. Both thermal and pressure
data carries forward from one element to the next until changed. Typing a value in the Hydro
pressure box causes CAESAR II to build a hydro case in the set of recommended load cases.
CAESAR II uses an ambient temperature of 70F, unless changed using the Special
Execution Parameters option. For more information, see New Job Ambient Temperature (on
page 54).

Double-click >> to display the Edit Operating Conditions dialog box.
Temperatures
Specifies operating temperatures. There are nine temperature boxes to allow up to nine
different operating cases. The error checker validates temperature values to insure that they
are within the code allowed ranges. You can exceed the ranges by typing the expansion
coefficient in the temperature box in units of length/length. When you are using material 21
(user-defined material), type a thermal expansion coefficient instead of a temperature.
Values, whose absolute values are less than the Alpha Tolerance, in the temperature box
are taken to be thermal expansion coefficients. The Alpha Tolerance is a configuration file
parameter and is taken to be 0.05 by default. For example, if you wanted to type the thermal
expansion coefficient equivalent to 11.37in./100ft., the calculation would be:
11.37in./100ft. * 1 ft./ 12in. = .009475 in./in.
Type this into the appropriate Temperature box.
A cut short does no more than reduce the length of a pipe element to zero. For
example; if you wanted 8.5 cm of cold spring you could put in an 8.5 cm long element and
then thermally shrink its length to zero. This allows the cold spring to be manipulated as an
individual thermal case rather than as a concentrated force.

Access to operating conditions 4 through 9 is granted through the Extended Operating

Conditions dialog box, accessible by clicking the >> button in the upper right corner of the
frame surrounding the standard Temperature and Pressure input boxes. You can keep this
dialog box open or closed for your convenience.
CAESAR II automatically suggests load cases according to IGE/TD/12 Appendix 7. Use the
following conventions for the specification of the operating conditions.
T1 Maximum Temperature
T2 Minimum Temperature
T3 Minimum Summer Temperature
T4 Maximum Winter Temperature
T5 Maximum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
T6 Minimum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
P1 Maximum Incidental Pressure
P2 Maximum Operating Pressure
P3 Compressor Operation
P4 Demand Pressure
HP Hydrotest Pressure

Thermal Expansion
Displays thermal expansion coefficients. CAESAR II displays the corresponding thermal
expansion coefficients in the fields when you type operating temperatures in the
temperature fields. When the thermal expansion coefficients are not in the material
database, you can type thermal expansion coefficients in the temperature field if the
absolute values are less than the Alpha Tolerance in the configuration. The Alpha
Tolerance is 0.05 by default. For more information, see Alpha Tolerance (on page 53). You
can type up to nine thermal expansion coefficients in units of length/length in the
temperature field on the Extended Operating Conditions dialogue box. CAESAR II
displays these values in the Thermal Expansion boxes.
Pressures
Specifies operating pressures. There are 10 pressure boxes, which allow up to nine
operating and one hydrotest pressure cases. When you type multiple pressures, be careful
with the setup of the analysis load cases. Review the recommended load cases provided by
the software carefully before proceeding.
Specify operating pressures 4 through 9 through the Extended Operating Conditions
dialog box, accessed by clicking the >> button in the upper right corner of the standard
Temperature and Pressure input boxes. You can work with this dialog box open and move
the box around for your convenience.
Type a value in the HydroPress box to signal CAESAR II to recommend a hydrotest load
case.
Type the design gage pressure (that is, the difference between the internal and external
pressures).
The software disables the Bourdon effect (pressure elongation) by default because it
assumes the job to be non-conservative. If you want to enable the Bourdon effect, you
can do so by using the Special Execution options. For more information, see New Job
Bourdon Pressure (on page 54).
The Bourdon effect is always considered in the analysis of fiberglass reinforced plastic
pipe (Material ID=20).
CAESAR II automatically suggests load cases according to IGE/TD/12 Appendix 7. You
must use the following conventions for the specification of the operating conditions.
T1 Maximum Temperature
T2 Minimum Temperature
T3 Minimum Summer Temperature
T4 Maximum Winter Temperature
T5 Maximum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
T6 Minimum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
P1 Maximum Incidental Pressure
P2 Maximum Operating Pressure
P3 Compressor Operation

P4 Demand Pressure
HP Hydrotest Pressure
Component Information
Special components (such as bends, rigid elements, expansion joints, and tees) require
additional information. You can define this information by selecting the component check box,
and then typing data in the auxiliary dialog box.
Bend
Double-click Bend if the active element ends in a bend, elbow or mitered joint. This displays
the auxiliary dialog box on the right side of the screen. CAESAR II usually assigns three
nodes to a bend to define the near, mid, and far nodes on the bend. For more information,
see Bends (on page 121).
Rigid
Double-click Rigid if the active element is much stiffer than the connecting pipe, such as a
flange or valve. This displays the auxiliary dialog box to collect the component weight. For
more information, see Rigid (on page 126).
For rigid elements, CAESAR II follows these rules:
When the rigid element weight is defined as a value other than zero, CAESAR II
computes any extra weight due to insulation and contained fluid. The software then
adds that value to the defined weight value.
The weight of fluid added to a non-zero weight rigid element is equal to the same
weight that would be computed for an equivalent straight pipe. The weight of
insulation added is equal to the same weight that would be computed for an
equivalent straight pipe multiplied by 1.75.
If the weight of a rigid element is zero or blank, CAESAR II assumes that the
element is an artificial construction element rather than an actual piping element. In
this case, the software does not calculate an insulation or fluid weight for that
element.
The stiffness of the rigid element is relative to the diameter wall thickness. Make
sure that the diameter on a rigid element indicates the rigid stiffness to generate.
Expansion Joint
Double-click Expansion Joint if the active element is an expansion joint. This displays the
auxiliary dialog box used to collect stiffness parameters and effective diameter. For more
information, see Expansion Joints (on page 126).
Expansion joints can be modeled as zero-length (with all stiffnesses acting at a single point)
or as finite-length (with the stiffnesses acting over a continuous element). In the single-point
case, you must type all stiffness. In the continuous element case, you must omit either the

lateral or angular stiffness.
SIF & Tees

Double-click SIF & Tees if the active element has special stress intensification factors
(SIFs). CAESAR II automatically calculates these factors for each component. For more
information, see SIFs & Tees (on page 131).
Bends, rigids, and expansion joints are mutually exclusive. For more information, see
Rigid (on page 126) and Expansion Joints (on page 126).
Bends
Indicates that the element is entering a bend. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the
Bend check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
You can place Intermediate node points at specified angles along the bend, or at the bend
mid-point (M).

Radius
Displays the bend radius. CAESAR II assumes a long radius by default. You can override
this value. Alternatively, select a value from the list.
Long - Indicates a long radius bend. The radius is equal to 1.5 times the nominal
diameter.
Short - Indicates a short radius bend. The radius is equal to the nominal pipe
diameter.
3D - Indicates a 3D bend. The radius is equal to 3 times the nominal diameter.
Type
Specifies the bend type. For most codes, this refers to the number of attached flanges and
can be selected from the list. If there are no flanges on the bend, leave Type blank. A bend
should be considered flanged if there is any heavy or rigid body within two diameters of the
bend that significantly restricts the bends ability to ovalize.
When using the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes with Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe,
this entry refers to the material laminate type and may be 1, 2, or 3. These laminate types
are
All chopped strand mat (CSM) constructing with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and
external surface tissue reinforced layer.
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and
The laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification factors
for the BS 7159 and UKOOA Codes only.
For ISO 14692, only type 3 filament-wound laminate is considered.
Angle
Displays the angle to a point on the bend curvature. You can place additional nodes at any
point on the bend curvature provided the added nodes are not within five degrees of each
other. You can change the 5 node-spacing limit by using the configuration. For more
information, see Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend (on page 68).
The element To node is always physically located at the far end of the bend. By
default, CAESAR II places a node at the midpoint of the bend (designated by the letter M in
this box) as well as at the zero degree position (start) of the bend, if possible.

Node
Displays the node number associated with the extra point on the bend. CAESAR II places
unique node numbers in these boxes whenever you initiate a bend. New, unique node
numbers must be assigned to the points whenever you add points on the bend curvature. If
numbering by fives and the To node number for the bend element is 35, a logical choice for
the node number for an added node at 30 degrees on the bend would be 34. You can treat
the added nodes on the bend like any other nodes in the piping system. Nodes on the bend
curvature may be restrained, displaced, or placed at the intersection of more than two pipes.
Nodes on a bend curvature are most commonly used as an intersection for a dummy leg or
for the location of a restraint. All nodes defined in this manner are plotted at the tangent
intersection point for the bend.
Miter Points
Displays the number of cuts in the bend if it is mitered. When you type a number, CAESAR
II checks if the mitered bend input is closely or widely spaced. If the bend is determined to
be widely spaced, and the number of miter cuts is greater than one, the bend should be
broken down into n single cut widely spaced miters, where n is the total number of cuts in
the bend. The number of cuts and the radius of the bend are all that is required to calculate
the SIFs and flexibilities for the bend as defined in the B31 codes. The bend radius and the
bend miter spacing are related by the following equations:
Closely Spaced Miters
R = S / (2 tan )
q = Bend Angle / (2 n) where n = number of miter cuts
Widely Spaced Miters
R = r2 (1.0 + cot q) / 2.0
r2 = (ri + ro) / 2.0
= Bend Angle / 2.0
Fitting Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the bend if that thickness is different than the thickness of the
matching pipe. If the thickness is greater than the matching pipe wall thickness, then the
inside diameter of the bend is smaller than the inside diameter of the matching pipe.
CAESAR II calculates section modulus for stress computations based on the properties of
the matching pipe as defined by the codes.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors; once as Tn,
and once when determining the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for
the flexibility characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r2)
Tn = Thickness of bend or fitting
R = Bend radius

r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe

= (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter of matching pipe
WT = Wall Thickness of matching pipe
Most codes use the actual thickness of the fitting (this entry) for Tn, and the wall thickness of
the matching pipe for the calculation of the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe (the WT
value). More specifically, the individual codes use the two wall thicknesses as follows:
Code For Tn: For Mean Radius Calculation:
B31.1 Fitting Fitting
B31.3 Fitting Matching Pipe
B31.8 Ch VIII Fitting Matching Pipe
SECT III NC Fitting Matching Pipe
SECT III ND Fitting Matching Pipe
Z662 Matching Pipe Matching Pipe
NAVY 505 Fitting Fitting
B31.1 (1967) Fitting Fitting
SWEDISH Fitting Matching Pipe
BS 806 N/A N/A
STOOMWEZEN N/A N/A
RCC-M C/D Matching Matching Pipe

Pipe
CODETI Fitting Fitting
NORWEGIAN Fitting Fitting
FDBR Fitting Fitting
BS 7159 Fitting Fitting

UKOOA Fitting Fitting
IGE/TD/12 Fitting Fitting
EN-13480 Fitting Matching Pipe
GPTC/Z380 Fitting Matching Pipe
The bend fitting thickness (FTG) is always used as the pipe thickness in the stiffness matrix
calculations. However, the thickness of the matching pipe (WT) is always used in the bend
stress calculations.
K-Factor
Specifies the bend flexibility factor. CAESAR II calculates the factor according to the current
piping code. You can type a value to override this calculation.
Seam-Welded
Indicates that the bend is seam welded.
B31.3
If the B31.3 piping code is active, the Seam Welded check box is used to activate the
Wl box for bends. The Wl box is the weld strength reduction factor used to determine
the minimum wall thickness of the bend element.
IGE/TD/12
Used by IGE/TD/12 to calculate the stress intensification factors due to seam welded
elbow fabrication as opposed to extruded elbow fabrication. This option is only available
when IGE/TD/12 is active.
Wl for Bends
B31.1 / B31.3 - Defines the weld strength reduction factor (W l) for bend elements. This
value is used in the minimum wall thickness calculations.
ISO 14692 - Replaces this box with EPTp/(EbTb) where Ep and Eb are the axial modulus of
the attached pipe and the bend respectively, Tp and Tb are the average wall thickness of the
attached pipe and the bend respectively. If these values are omitted, the software uses a
default value of 1.0. This value affects the calculation of the flexibility factor for bends.

Rigid
Indicates that you are supplying rigid element data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Rigid check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Type a value for Rigid Weight. This value should always be zero or positive and should not
include the weight of any insulation or fluid. If you type no weight, then CAESAR II models the
element as a weightless construction element.
Rigid weights are defined automatically if you use the Valve and Flange database.
CAESAR II automatically includes 1.0 times the fluid weight of equivalent straight pipe and 1.75
times the insulation weight of equivalent straight pipe.
Rigid elements with zero weight are considered to be modeling constructs and do not have fluid
or insulation weight added.
The rigid element stiffness is proportional to the matching pipe. For example, a 13 in. long 12 in.
diameter rigid element is stiffer than a 13 in. long 2 in. diameter rigid element. This fact should
be observed when modeling rigid elements that are part of a small pipe/large vessel, or small
pipe/heavy equipment model. The stiffness properties are computed using 10 times the
thickness of the rigid element. For additional details, see Technical Discussions (on page 879).
Type the rigid element in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes.
See Valve (on page 247) for automatic input for these types of components.
Expansion Joints
Indicates that you are supplying expansion joint data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking Expansion Joint on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls options for expansion joint stiffness parameters and
effective diameter. For a non-zero length expansion joint, you must omit either the transverse or
the bending stiffness.
Setting the effective diameter to zero deactivates the pressure thrust load. Use this
method in conjunction with setting a large axial stiffness to simulate the effect of axial tie-rods.

Zero Length Expansion Joints

Specifies zeroes in the DX, DY, and DZ fields (or leave the fields blank) for hinged and
gimball joints. Use 1.0 to define completely flexible stiffness and 1.0E12 to define completely
rigid stiffness. You must type all stiffnesses.
Finite Length Expansion Joints

Specifies the expansion joint vector in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes. Because the transverse
stiffness is directly related to the bending stiffness for finite length expansion joints, type only
one of these stiffnesses. CAESAR II calculates the other stiffness automatically based on
flexible length, effective ID, and the other stiffness. In general, type the transverse stiffness
and leave the bending stiffness blank.
Bellows Stiffness Properties

Specifies the expansion joint parameters.
If the element length is zero, then you should define all of the stiffnesses. If the element
length is not zero, then you should leave blank either the Bending Stif or the Trans Stif
box. CAESAR II automatically calculates the stiffness that you did not type. You can type all
stiffnesses for rubber expansion joints
If the torsional stiffness value is not specified, CAESAR II uses a default value of
0.10000E+06.
Bending STIFFNESSES from EJMA (and from most expansion joint manufacturers) that are
used in a finite length expansion joint model should be multiplied by four before being used
in any piping software. Bending STIFFNESSES from EJMA (and from most expansion joint
manufacturers) that are used in a ZERO length expansion joint model should be used
without modification.
Use 1.0 for bellows stiffnesses that are completely flexible.
Use 1.0E12 for rigid bellows stiffnesses.
Zero length expansion joints can be used in many modeling applications, such as defining
struts or hinged ends. The orientation of zero length expansion joints is taken from the
element that precedes the expansion joint if the To node of the preceding element is equal
to the From node on the expansion joint element. If the preceding element does not go into
the expansion joint, then the orientation is taken from the element that follows the expansion
joint if it properly leaves the joint.

Effective ID
Specifies the effective inside diameter for pressure thrust from the manufacturer's catalog.
For all load cases, including pressure, CAESAR II calculates the pressure thrust force
tending to blow the bellows apart. If left blank, or zero, then no axial thrust force due to
pressure is calculated. Many manufacturers give the effective area of the expansion joint:
Aeff. The Effective ID is calculated from the effective area by:
Effective ID = (4Aeff / )1/2
Reducer
Indicates that you are supplying reducer data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Reducer on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Specifies the Diameter 2, Thickness 2, and Alpha values at the To node of the reducer. The
diameter and wall thickness at the From node of the reducer element are taken from the current
piping element data.

CAESAR II constructs a concentric reducer element made of ten pipe cylinders, each of a
successively larger or smaller diameter and wall thickness over the element length. CAESAR II
calculates SIFs according to the current piping code (for more information, see Code
Compliance Considerations (on page 957)) and applies these internally to the Code Stress
Calculations. These SIFs are dependent on the slope of the reducer transition (among other
code-specific considerations), Alpha. If Alpha is left blank, then the software calculates this
value based on the change in pipe diameter over 60% of the element length. If specified,
Diameter 2 and Thickness 2 are carried forward when the next pipe element is created as
Diameter and Wt/Sch. If not specified, Diameter 2 and Thickness 2 are assumed to be equal
to Diameter and Wt/Sch on the following element dialog box.
If there is no value for Alpha is specified on the dialog box, CAESAR II reports the alpha value
in the Errors and Warnings dialog box.
Diameter 2
Specifies the diameter at the To of the reducer element. The value carries forward as the
diameter of the following element. Nominal values are converted to actual values if that
feature is active. If left blank, CAESAR II uses the diameter from the following element as
Diameter 2.
Thickness 2
Specifies the wall thickness at the To node of the reducer element. The value carries
forward as the wall thickness of the following element. Nominal values are converted to
actual values if that feature is active. If this option is left blank, CAESAR II uses the
thickness from the following element as Thickness 2.

Alpha
Specifies the slope, in degrees, of the reducer transition. If left blank, CAESAR II assumes
the slope equal to the arc tangent 1/2(the change in diameters) / (length of sloped portion of
reducer).
TD/12. This entry is a required input for IGE/TD/12.
Because all reducers are different, the actual length of sloped portion of reducer is unknown
unless you define it. Because of this, if Alpha is not specified, CAESAR II makes an
assumption that the length of sloped portion of reducer is equal to 60% of the total reducer
length. If you leave the Alpha value blank, then CAESAR II defaults to arc tangent 1/2(the
change in diameters) / (0.60 x element length).
R1
Specifies the transition radius for the large end of the reducer as shown in Appendix 4,
Table 8 of IGE/TD/12 Code. This option is enabled only when IGE/TD/12 is active.
R2
Specifies the transition radius for the small end of the reducer as shown in Appendix 4,
Table 8 of IGE/TD/12. This option is enabled only when IGE/TD/12 is active.

SIFs & Tees

Indicates that you are supplying SIF and tee data. Select or clear by double-clicking the SIFs &
Tees check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls options for stress intensification factors (SIFs), or fitting
types, for up to two nodes per element. If you select components from the list, CAESAR II
automatically calculates the SIF values according to the applicable code unless you override this
behavior. Certain fittings and certain codes require additional data. Boxes display as appropriate
for the selected fitting.
There are two basic component types:

Three element intersection components
Two element joint components

A fully defined intersection model requires that three pipes frame into the intersection node and
that two of them are co-linear. Partial intersection assumptions are made for junctions where
you have coded one or two pipes into the intersection node, but these models are not
recommended. Two element joint components can be formed equally well with one or two
elements framing into the node.
You only need to type the intersection or joint type and properties on one of the elements going
to the junction. CAESAR II duplicates the intersection characteristics for all other pipes framing
into the intersection.
Fully review the warning messages coming from CAESAR II during error checking.
These messages detail any assumptions made during the assembly and calculation of the
intersection SIFs.
The available intersections and joint types, along with the other parameters that can affect the
stress intensification factors for the respective component, are shown in the table that follows.
Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations (Except for ISO 14692)*
1 REINFORCED FABRICATED TEE PAD THK FTG RO CROTCH
2 UNREINFORCED FABRICATED FTG RO CROTCH

TEE
3 WELDING TEE FTG RO CROTCH
4 SWEEPOLET CROTCH
5 WELDOLET CROTCH
6 EXTRUDED WELDING TEE FTG RO CROTCH
7 GIRTH BUTT WELD WELD D OR

ID
8 SOCKET WELD (NO UNDERCUT) FILLET
9 SOCKET WELD (AS WELDED) FILLET
10 TAPERED TRANSITION WELD D
11 THREADED JOINT
12 DOUBLE WELDED SLIP-ON
13 LAP JOINT FLANGE (B16.9)
14 BONNEY FORGE SWEEPOLET
15 BONNEY FORGE LATROLET WELD ID

16 BONNEY FORGE INSERT

WELDOLET
17 FULL ENCIRCLEMENT TEE FTG RO WELD ID
*This list does not include input items effecting SIF calculations for ISO 14692. For more
information on ISO 14692, see Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations For ISO 14692
(on page 140).
Node
Specifies the node number where the stress intensification exists. CAESAR II displays the
To node of the current element by default. You can type any node in the system, but it is
most often at a pipe intersection or joint.
If the node is at an intersection, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for all pipes going to the
intersection if the intersection Type is specified. You only need to type the intersection type
once. CAESAR II finds all other pipes framing into the intersection and applies the
appropriate SIFs.
If the node is at a two-pipe joint, such as a butt weld, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for the two
pipes going to the joint node if the joint Type is specified. You only need to specify the joint
type once. CAESAR II finds the other pipe completing the joint and applies the appropriate
SIFs.
If the node is not at an intersection or a joint then, leave the Type box blank and type user
defined SIFs in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes. Entries in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes only
apply to the element on which they are defined.
User defined stress intensification factors must be greater than or equal to one.
CAESAR II calculates and displays code-defined SIFs in the Intersection SIF scratchpad.
Access this scratchpad from the Classic Piping Input dialog box by clicking Environment
> Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes or Intersection SIF scratchpad on the Input
Tools toolbar. You can modify parameters used in the scratchpad so that you can observe
the effects of different geometries and thicknesses. Most changes made in the scratchpad
can be automatically transferred back into the model.
If the node is on any part of the bend curvature then the following applies:
You cannot override code calculated SIFs for bends by default. A configuration
option exists to override this default. For more information, see Allow User's SIF at
Bend (on page 97). If you set Allow User's SIF at Bend to True, then you can
specify SIFs for bend To nodes. The SIFs specified in this way apply for the entire
bend curvature.
CAESAR II applies user-defined SIFs to straight pipe going to points on a bend
curvature regardless of any parameter in the setup file. This option is commonly
used to intensify injector tie-ins at bends, or dummy legs, or other bend
attachment-type of supports.

Type
Specifies the type of tee or joint.
For non-FRP piping codes, there are six types of tees and ten types of joints. These
elements correspond to 1 to 6 and 7 to 16 in the Input Items Optionally Effecting SIF
Calculations (see "Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations (Except for ISO
14692)*" on page 132) table.
For BS 7159 and UKOOA, there are two types of tees: Moulded and Fabricated.
Moulded tee corresponds to either the Welding (3) or Extruded (6) welding tee
Type. Fabricated tee corresponds to a tee Type of Reinforced (1).
For IGE/TD/12, there are 11 types of tees and joints. For specialized diagrams of
tee type with this code, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page 150).
For ISO 14692, there are three types of tee and joints: Tee (1), Qualified Tee (3),
and Joint (2). Select 1 - Tee for the software to use the method specified in the ISO
14692 code for non-qualified tees. Select 2 - Joint for CAESAR II to use the
calculations specified in the code for joints and fittings. Select 3 - Qualified Tee for
the software to use the code-specified calculation for qualified service stress for
tees (including the pressure stress multiplier, m pst).
ASME NC and ND piping codes do not include equations for SIFs with a tee Type
of Sweepolet (4), Weldolet (5), or Extruded (6). When you specify one of these tee
types, CAESAR II uses B31.1 equations.
In-Plane SIF (ii)

Indicates the in-plane stress intensification factors (SIFs) for a bend or an intersection.
Specify this value for any point in the piping system by selecting the SIFs & Tees check box
on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the stress applies.
Then, specify the In-Plane SIF (ii) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the In-Plane SIF (ii) and Out-Plane SIF (io) boxes,
CAESAR II performs code-related calculations.
For more information on stress intensification factors (SIFs) in CAESAR II, see Stress
Intensification Factors Details.
In-Plane Index (Ii)

Indicates the in-plane sustained stress index (Ii) value.
on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the stress index
applies. Then, specify the In-Plane (Ii) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the In-Plane Index (Ii) box, CAESAR II sets the value
to the greater value of either 0.75 multiplied by the In-Plane SIF value (ii) or 1.0.

Out-Plane SIF (io)

Indicates the out-of-plane stress intensification factors (SIFs) for a bend or intersection.
on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the stress applies.
Then, specify the Out-Plane SIF (io) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the In-Plane SIF (ii) and Out-Plane SIF (io) boxes,
CAESAR II performs code-related calculations.
Out-Plane Index (Io)

Indicates the out-of-plane sustained stress index (I o) value.
applies. Then, specify the Out-Plane Index (io) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Out-Plane Index (Io) box, CAESAR II sets the
value to the greater value of either 0.75 multiplied by the Out-Plane SIF value (io) or 1.0.
Torsion SIF (it)

Indicates the torsional SIF (it) value for a bend or an intersection.
applies. Then, specify the Torsion SIF (it) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Torsion SIF (it) box, CAESAR II sets the value to
1.0 by default.
Torsion Index (It)

Indicates the sustained torsional moment index (I t). You can use this index value (along with
the torsional moment due to sustained loads) to determine the amount of stress that is due
to sustained torsional moment.
applies. Then, specify the Torsion Index (It) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Torsion Index (It) box, CAESAR II sets the value
to 1.0 by default.

Axial SIF (ia)

Indicates the longitudinal (axial) SIF (ia) value on a bend or at an intersection.
on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the SIF applies.
Then, specify the Axial SIF (ia) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
The B31.3 code indicates that, in the absence of more applicable data, the Axial SIF
(ia) value is 1 for elbows, pipe bends, and miter bends. The ia value is the same as the
Out-Plane SIF (io) value for all other components.
Axial Index (Ia)

Indicates the sustained longitudinal (axial) force index (I a). You can use this index value
(along with the longitudinal force due to sustained loads and the dimensions of a
cross-sectional area of the pipe) to determine the amount of stress that is due to sustained
longitudinal force.
applies. Then, specify the Axial Index (Ia) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Axial Index (Ia) box, CAESAR II sets the value to
1.0 by default.
Pressure SIF (ip)

Indicates the pressure SIF (ip) value for a bend or an intersection.
on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the stress pressure
applies. Then, specify the Pressure SIF (ip) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Pressure SIF (ip) box, CAESAR II sets the value
to 1.0 by default.

Pressure Index (Ip)

Indicates the sustained pressure index (I p).
applies. Then, specify the Pressure Index (ip) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Pressure Index (Ip) box, CAESAR II sets the
value to 1.0 by default.
Pad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the reinforcing pad for reinforced fabricated or full encirclement
tees (intersection type #1 and #17, respectively). The pad thickness is only valid for these
intersection types. If the thickness of a type #1 or type #17 intersection is left blank or the
value entered is zero, the software uses the SIFs for an unreinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the pad thickness is limited to 1.5 times the
nominal thickness of the header. This factor does not apply in BS 806 or Z184, and is 2.5 in
the Swedish piping code.
Ftg Ro
Specifies the fitting outside radius for branch connections. This option is used for reduced
branch connections in the ASME and B31.1 piping codes, Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets,
and for WRC 329 intersection SIF calculations. Configuration options exist to invoke the
WRC 329 calculations and to limit the application of the reduced branch connection rules to
unreinforced fabricated tees, sweepolets, weldolets, and extruded welding tees. If omitted,
Ftg Ro defaults to the outside radius of the branch pipe.
CROTCH R
Specifies the crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee, intersection type 6.
This is also the intersection weld crotch radius for WRC329 calculations. Specifying this
value can result in a 50% reduction in the stress intensification at the WRC 329 intersection.
If you attempt to reduce the stress riser at a fabricated intersection by guaranteeing that
there is a smooth transition radius from the header to the branch pipe, then you may reduce
the resulting stress intensification by a factor of 2.0.

WELD (D)
Specifies the average circumferential weld mismatch measured at the inside diameter of the
pipe. This value is used for Butt Welds and Tapered transitions. This is the average; not the
maximum mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are
satisfied for your particular code.
FILLET
Specifies the fillet leg length. This option is used only in conjunction with a socket weld
component. This value is the length of the shorter leg for an unequal leg fillet weld. If a fillet
leg is given, both socket weld types result in the same SIF. See appendix D of the B31
piping codes for further clarification.
Weld ID
Specifies the weld identifier value. Choose from the following options:
0 or BLANK - As Welded
1 - Finished/Ground Flush
This box is only applicable for:
IGE/TD/12
Bonney Forge Sweepolets
Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets
Butt Welds in the Swedish Piping Codes or the IGE/TD/12 code
If you specify a value of 1 - Finished/Ground Flush, then the software considers the weld
to be ground flush on the inside and out and it calculates the SIF as 1.0.
For more information on how input parameters are used to compute SIFs for girth butt
welds, see WELD (D) (on page 138).
B1; Wc
Specifies values that depend upon the code that you are using.
ASME Class 2 and ASME Class 3
Defines the primary stress index used for the given node on the current element.
Unless you otherwise over ride this value, the following values are applied for ASME Class 2
and Class 3 piping:
Straight Pipe: B1 = 0.5 B2 = 1.0
Curved Pipe: B1 = -0.1 + 0.4h; but not <0 or >0.5

B2 = 1.30/h**2/3 but not <1.0; h = tR/ rm**2
Intersections: B1 = 0.5

Butt Welded Tees: B2b = 0.4(R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0

B2r = 0.5(R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0
Branch Connections: (r < 0.5R)

B2b = 0.50 C2b but not < 1.0
B2r = 0.75 C2r but not < 1.0
C2b = 3(R/T)**2/3 (r/R)**1/2 (t/T)(r/FTG ro) but not < 1.5
C2r = 1.15(r/t)**1/4 but not < 1.5
B31.1 / B31.3
Defines the weld strength reduction factor (W c) used to reduce the allowable stress for the
sustained load case.
BS-7159 and UKOOA
Defines the pressure stress multiplier (m) if it is different than the code requirements. For
straight pipe, m = 1.0; for bends and tees, m is defined in Figures 7.1 and 7.12 of the BS
7159 Code.
IGE/TD/12
Override the cyclic pressure stress intensification factor Ip(Cyc) if it is different than the code
calculations (calculated according to Table 9, Figure 5, and Figure 7 of the code).
B2
Specifies the primary stress index for the given node on the current element. This entry is
only applicable for ASME Class 2 and 3 piping.
If omitted, B1 and B2 are defaulted as follows:
Straight Pipe: B1=0.5 B2=1.0
Curved Pipe: B1=-0.1+0.4h; but not <0 or >0.5

B2=1.30/h2/3; but not <1.0; h=tR/rm 2
Intersections: B1=0.5
Butt-Welded Tees: B2b=0.4(R/T)2/3 but not <1.0

B2r=0.5(R/T)2/3 but not <1.0
Branch Connections: (r<0.5R)

B2b=0.50 C2b but not <1.0
B2r=0.75 C2r but not <1.0
C2b=3(R/T)2/3 (r/R)1/2 (t/T)(r/FTG ro) but not <1.5
C2r=1.15(r/t)1/4 but not <1.5
You can use the SIF(IN) and SIF(OUT) boxes to override the CAESAR II calculated values

for any intersection. Override values only apply for the single element on which they are
defined. SIFs can be calculated for partial intersections and dummy legs.
When IGE/TD/12 is active, the SIF/TEE dialog box changes its appearance to
accommodate specialized SIF parameters. Refer to the supplementary IGE/TD/12
documentation for further information.
Code Options (B31.1 & B31.8)

B31.1
Indicates that the tee meets the dimensional criteria of Figure D1 as well as Notes 10a, 10c,
10d, 10e, and 10f. This allows the software to use the branch equation when determining
the SIF value for the tee. Note that this option relies on the setting of the Configuration
Options Reduced Intersection and No RFT / WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs.
B31.8
Indicates that the software should use B31.8 Notes 6, 9, or 10, as applicable, when
determining the SIF value for the tee.
ASME NC and ND
Indicates that the tee meets the dimensional criteria of Figure 3673.2(b)-2 as well as Notes
10 and 11. This allows the software to use the branch equation when determining the SIF
value for the tee. Note that this option relies on the setting of the Configuration Options
Reduced Intersection and No RFT / WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs.
ASME NC/ND 3673.2(b)-1 Note 3
Indicates that the material for this tee is ferrous, which enables the software to compute the
Y value based on the highest temperature value specified.
Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations For ISO 14692

When you select SIF & Tees on the Classic Piping Input dialog box, the Auxiliary panel for
SIFs/Tees becomes active. The Type box indicates what type of tee or joint to use for the piping
code specified. The software uses this input in the same way for most piping codes. However,
there are only a few tee and joint types for ISO 14692.
1 Tee
2 Joint
3 Qualified Tee
Specifying a tee, a qualified tee, or a joint in the Type box allows CAESAR II to perform the
correct allowable stress calculations.
Select 1 - Tee for the software to use the method specified in the ISO 14692 code for
non-qualified tees.
Select 2 - Joint for CAESAR II to use the calculations specified in the code for joints and
fittings.

Select 3 - Qualified Tee for the software to use the code-specified calculation for qualified
service stress for tees (including the pressure stress multiplier, m pst).
User-Defined SIFs Anywhere in the Piping System

SIFs for non-intersection points are normally taken to be 1.0 unless the piping element is a
bend. If the SIF should be greater than (1.0), then you can type the non-unity SIF in the
Intersection Auxiliary box without specifying the intersection type. A user-defined SIF only
acts at the node on the current element.
Stress Intensification Factors and Stress Indices Details

CAESAR II calculates SIFs automatically for bends and defined intersections as specified by
the applicable piping code. You can type a user-defined SIF for any point in the piping
system by activating the SIFs & Tees check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Type the node number where the stress is to be intensified in the first available Node box.
Type the in-plane and out-plane stress intensification factors in the In-Plane SIF (ii) and the
Out-Plane SIF (io) boxes. Specify any axial and torsion index values on the elements on
the Axial Index (Ia) and Torsion Index (It) boxes.
You cannot specify SIFs for bend elements unless the Allow User's SIF at Bend
option is set to True in the configuration file. For more information, see Allow User's SIF at
Bend (on page 97). Code defined SIFs always apply.
CAESAR II does not allow user-defined stress intensification factors to be less than 1.0.
The node to be intensified must be the To or the From node on the current element.
Stresses are only intensified at the element end going to the specified node. For example, if
two pipes frame into node 10, one going from 5 to 10, and the other from 10 to 15 and a
stress intensification factor of 2.0 for node 10 is defined on the element from 5 to 10, then
the 10 end of the element from 5 to 10 has a stress intensification of 2.0 and the 10 end of
the element from 10 to 15 has a stress intensification of 1.0.
You can use user-defined stress intensification factors to override code calculated values for
nodes at intersections. For example, let node 40 be an intersection defined by an
unreinforced fabricated tee. The header pipes framing into the intersection go from 35 to 40
and from 40 to 45. The branch pipe framing into the intersection goes from 175 to 40. The
code-calculated values for the stress intensification factors in the header pipes are:
SIF (ii) = 4.50
SIF (io) = 3.75
and in the branch pipe are
SIF (ii) = 6.70
SIF (io) = 5.58
Also assume that finite element analysis of the intersection showed the header stress
intensification factors to be 2.3 and 1.87 respectively and the branch stress intensification
factors to be equal to the code recommended value, which is 6.70 and 5.58. To properly
override the code-calculated stress intensification factors for the header pipes, two pipe
elements must be modified:

35 to 40 Node 40
Type:
SIF (ii): 2.3
SIF (io): 1.87
40 to 15 Node 40
Type:
SIF (ii): 2.3
SIF (io): 1.87
The stress intensification for the branch pipes can be calculated according to the code, so
part of the branch pipe data might appear:
175 to 40 NODE 40
Type: 2 - Unreinforced
SIF (ii):
SIF (io):
If either of the SIF boxes for the header elements going to 40 were left blank, the
code-calculated value would be used in its place. This is only true where code-calculated
values exist along with user-specified values.
If the element from 110 to 115 needs the stress intensification factors for each of its ends is
2.0, then a part of that element data might appear:
110 to 115 Node 110

Type:
SIF (ii): 2.0
SIF (io):
Node: 115
Type:
SIF (ii): 2.0
SIF (io):
Leaving the out-of-plane stress intensification factor blank implies that it is equal to the
in-plane stress intensification factor. There are no code-calculated values to override these
user-input values.
If you do not specify Torsion SIF (it), Axial SIF (ia), and Pressure SIF (ip), CAESAR II
calculates the values as 1.
The ASME B31.3 code update also introduced using the stress indices in sustained stress
equations.
If you do not specify the In-Plane Index (Ii), then CAESAR II uses the greater value of
either 0.75 multiplied by the In-Plane SIF value (ii) or 1.0.

If you do not specify the Out-Plane Index (Io), then CAESAR II uses the greater value of
either of 0.75 multiplied by the Out-Plane SIF (io) or 1.
If you do not specify the Torsion Index (It), Axial Index (Ia), and Pressure Index (Ip),
CAESAR II sets these values to 1.
Currently, the software does not use the Pressure SIF (ip) or Pressure Index (Ip) in
the calculation.
You are not permitted to override code-calculated stress intensification factors for bend
elements unless the Allow User's SIF at Bend option is set to True in the configuration file.
Additionally, bend stress intensification factors supersedes any code-calculated intersection
stress intensification factors for the same node. This characteristic allows you to apply
code-calculated intersection stress intensification factors to dummy legs without disturbing
the normal bend stress intensification factors. The node on the dummy leg, which is also on
the bend curvature, is defined as an intersection on the Intersection SIF Scratchpad. The
intersection stress intensification factors are calculated and can be applied to the dummy leg
end that connects to the bend. Bend stress intensification factors are unchanged.
Stress intensification factors can be calculated for intersections having one, two, or three
pipes framing into it. Where two pipes form a partial intersection, CAESAR II assumes that
the larger pipe is the header and the smaller the branch.
Where one pipe forms a partial intersection, CAESAR II assumes that the intersection is full
sized.
CAESAR II does not calculate stress intensification factors for intersections having more
than three pipes framing into it (for example, a cross, and for non 90-degree branches, such
as lateral intersections).
SIF Scratchpad
View the stress intensification factors calculated by CAESAR II interactively from the
Classic Piping Input dialog box by clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Intersection
Nodes or Intersection SIF scratchpad on the Input Tools toolbar.
View the stress intensification factors at bends from the Classic Piping Input dialog box by
clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Bends or Bend SIF scratchpad on the Input
Tools toolbar.

The SIF scratchpads display after you type in the node number to review when prompted.
The node must be a valid bend node when reviewing SIFs at bends.
You can interactively change any of the data and recalculate the SIFs. This allows you to
see the effect of changing geometries and properties on code stress intensification factors.
CAESAR II allows you to transfer data from the scratchpad back to the actual model.

IGE\TD\12 Requirements
IGE\TD\12 requires different information than the other codes used in CAESAR II. When
IGE\TD\12 is active, the SIFs/Tees Auxiliary field changes to accommodate specialized SIF
parameters. For more information regarding the specialized parameters refer to the text and
figures at the end of this section.
Node
appropriate SIFs.

SIFs.
bend curvature.
Type
Specifies the type of tees or joints.
Do/r3
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Forged Tee to BS 1640
Specifies the Do value. For more information on Do, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 150).
Weldolet
Specifies the r3 value. For more information on r3, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
page 150).
Weldoflange
150).

T/Th/T'b
Specifies the T value. For more information on T, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Weldolet
Specifies the theta value. For more information on theta, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
150).
Weldoflange
page 150).
Te/Tb
Fabricated Tee with Pad
Specifies the Te value. For more information on Te, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
150).
Full Encirclement Tee
150).
Long Weldneck Flange
150).
Weldoflange
150).

rp/do
Fabricated Tee
Specifies the rp value. For more information on rp, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Specifies the do value. For more information on do, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
150).
150).
Weldoflange
150).
r2/rc
Fabricated Tee
150).
Specifies the rc value. For more information on rc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Sweepolet
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
150).

150).
Weldoflange
150).
r1/Tc/Lh
Fabricated Tee
150).
Specifies the Tc value. For more information on Tc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Sweepolet
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lh value. For more information on Lh, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
150).
Weldoflange
150).
L1/Lb
Fabricated Tee
Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee

Specifies the Lb value. For more information on Lb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
150).
Weldoflange
150).
IGE\TD\12 Reference
Use the figures below to identify the specialized parameters.

Forged Tee
Weldolet

Drawn/Extruded Tee
Weldoflange


Sweepolet
Fabricated Tee

Weld ID
IGE/TD/12
Stress Concentration Factors

Overrides the stress concentration factors calculated according to the IGE/TD/12 Code
equations. Any values typed here apply only to the element on which they have been
specified except when entered on a bend node. In that case, they apply throughout the
bend.
For branches of tees, any bending SCFs specified here must include the "w" term.
Fatigue Class
Overrides the fatigue class calculated according to the IGE/TD/12 Code equations. Any
values selected here apply only to the element on which they have been specified except
when entered on a bend node. In that case, they apply throughout the bend.
Boundary Conditions
The check boxes in this block open the auxiliary dialog box tabs to collect information on items
which restrain (or impose movement on) the pipe. These items include restraints, hangers,
flexible nozzles or displacements. Though not required, it is recommended that you define such
information on the dialog box which has that point as the From node or To node. This is of
benefit if the data must be located for modification. The auxiliary dialog box tabs allow you to
specify up to four restraints (devices which in some way modify the free motion of the system),
one hanger, one nozzle, or two sets of nodal displacements per element. If needed, you can
define additional conditions for any node on other elements.

Restraints
Indicates that you are supplying restraint data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the
Restraints check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls data for up to four restraints for each element. Node
number and restraint types are required. All other information is optional. If you omit the
stiffness, entry defaults to rigid.
You can specify skewed restraints by typing direction cosines with the type, such as X
(1,0,1) for a restraint running at 45 in the X-Z plane.
You can specify as many as four restraints for an element. If you need to specify more than four
restraints on one element, you can place the additional restraints on any other element.
Do not use restraints in the following three situations:
1. Imposed Displacements - Specify displacements for the point using the Displacement
Auxiliary box.
2. Flexible Nozzles - Use the Nozzles Flex check box to open the Nozzles Auxiliary Data
box to input the vessel or tank characteristics required by WRC 297, PD 5500, or API 650 to

calculate local nozzle flexibilities. After these flexibilities have been calculated, CAESAR II
automatically inserts the necessary restraints and flexibilities into the piping model.
3. Hangers program designed or pre-defined spring hangers - Use the Hangers check
box to open the Hanger Auxiliary Data box.
Node
Specifies the node number where the restraint is to act. The node number does not have to
be on the current element.
CNode
Specifies the connecting node. Restraints with connecting nodes can be used to tie one
node in the piping system to any other node in the system. If left blank then the restraint
node is tied by the restraint stiffness to a fixed point in space. If the connecting node is
specified then the restraint node is tied by the restraint stiffness to the connecting node.
In all cases, CNodes associate nodal degrees of freedom. Additionally, CNodes can be
used to geometrically connect different parts of a model graphically. This option is controlled
by the configuration option Connect Geometry through CNodes (on page 69).
Type
Specifies the restraint type. You can select a restraint from the list in the Restraint
Auxiliary box. For more information, see Section 3 of the CAESAR II Applications Guide.
Restraint Type Abbreviation
Anchor ANC
Translational Double Acting X, Y, or Z
Rotational Double Acting RX, RY, or RZ
Guide, Double Acting GUIDE
Double Acting Limit Stop LIM
Translational Double Acting Snubber XSNB, YSNB, ZSNB
Translational Directional +X, -X, +Y, -Y, +Z, -Z
Rotational Directional +RX, -RX, +RY, etc.
Directional Limit Stop +LIM, -LIM

Large Rotation Rod XROD, YROD, ZROD
Translational Double Acting Bilinear X2, Y2, Z2
Rotational Double Acting Bilinear RX2, RY2, RZ2
Translational Directional Bilinear -X2, +X2, -Y2, etc.
Rotational Directional Bilinear +RX2, -RX2, +RY2, etc.
Bottom Out Spring XSPR, YSPR, ZSPR
Directional Snubber +XSNB, -XSNB, +YSNB, etc.
Anchor
Specifies an anchor restraint. This type of restraint is defined for all degrees of freedom at
the node.
X, Y, or Z
Specifies translational restraints which can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a sign, it
defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the specified degree-of-freedom.
For example, a +Y restraint is a restraint against movement in the minus -Y direction. It is
free to move in the plus Y direction.
X (cosx, cosy, cosz) or X (vecx, vecy, vecz)

Specifies translational skewed restraints. These values can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If
you type a direction vector such as vecx, vecy, or vecz, CAESAR II converts the direction
vector into the corresponding cosines.
RX, RY, or RZ
Specifies rotational restraints which can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a sign, it
defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the specified degree-of-freedom.

Guide
Specifies a transverse restraint that can be skewed.
LIM
Specifies limit stops. These are axial restraints that can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you
type a sign, it defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the element
longitudinal axis.
XROD, YROD, ZROD

Specifies translational, large rotation, rod, or hanger-type restraints. These values can be
preceded by a (+) or (-) sign to indicate the orientation of the pivot point about which the rod
swings. A (+) is assumed. In the case of a YROD, this implies that the pivot point is above
the pipe. The rod or hanger length is also required.
XROD (COSX, COSY, COSZ) or XROD (VECX, VECY, VECZ)

Specifies translational skewed, large rotation rod, or hanger type restraints.
X2, Y2, Z2
Specifies bilinear restraints. These are restraints that have two different stiffnesses
associated with them. The stiffness is dependent upon the loading on the restraint. Bilinear
restraints can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
RX (cosx, cosy, cosz) or RX (vecx, vecy, vecz)

Specifies rotational skewed restraints.
XSPR, YSPR, ZSPR

Specifies spring supports. These values can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
A bottom out spring requires additional input. The additional input includes the spring rate,
allowed travel, and initial load. If the allowed travel in the direction of support is exceeded,
the spring bottoms-out.

XSNB, YSNB, ZSNB

Specifies snubbers, which are restraints that engage only during quick movements such as
those induced by a shock. They only act on the piping system in the occasional load case.
Snubbers can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
Because CAESAR II cannot perform load stepping, static analysis with snubbers requires a
preliminary manual analysis to determine thermal movements. Here is the procedure.
1. Analyze a hot operating case without your occasional loads.
2. Take the displacements from this analysis at the snubbers and put them back into the
input.
3. At the location where the snubbers are defined, define a CNODE and put these
displacements on the CNODE.
4. For your real analysis, apply these displacements to all load cases. Because they are
on the far side of the snubber, they won't affect anything unless the load case is called
OCC, which activates the snubber stiffness.
So:
When you run your standard OPE case (W+T1+P1+D1), the snubber node
displaces as before. There are no restraints because the load case is OPE, not
OCC.
When you run the operating + occasional case (W+T1+P1+D1+WIND1), the
snubber node displaces along with its CNODE. There is a difference in these two
displacements due to the WIND1 load and the snubber stiffness, because the case
is now set as OCC.
K2
Specifies the yield stiffness of a bilinear restraint. When the load on the restraint exceeds
Fy, the stiffness on the restraint changes from K1 to K2. CAESAR II treats K2 values of zero
as rigid. Type a value of 1.0 for very small stiffnesses.
Gap
Specifies the following values:
TYPE = X Y Z GUI LIM RX RY RZ
GAP - Specifies the distance along the restraint line of action that the restrained node can
travel before resistance to movement begins. The gap value must be positive. The gap is
given in degrees for rotational restraints. If the translational restraint is not preceded by a
sign, then the restraint is double acting and the gap exists for both positive and negative
displacements along the line of action. For example, if a 0.25 in. gap is specified at a +Y
restraint, then the restrained node can move freely 0.25 in. in the minus Y direction before
restraint occurs. The gap specification does not affect the amount of free displacement that
can occur along the positive Y direction in this example.
You can type two restraints having the same line of action but with different signs at the
same node when you define windows of allowed movement. Be careful to remember to form
the window with signs on restraints rather than with signs on gaps. A gap is a measure of

length in CAESAR II. A gap is always positive.

Examples:
TYPE GUI GAP 1/4 ... One quarter in. gap on either side of the guided restraint.
TYPE +Y GAP 3.0 ... Three in. gap below the support that must be closed before the +Y
support begins acting.
TYPE RX GAP 5.0 ... Five degree gap about the X axis about which the pipe may rotate
freely before rotational restraint occurs.
TYPE = XROD YROD ZROD
Len - Specifies the swinging length of the rod or hanger. This is the distance along the
restraint line of action from the restrained node to the pivot point. The restraint swings about
the pivot point. If a CNODE is defined then the restraint swings about the CNODE. Len is a
required entry.
TYPE = X2 Y2 Z2 RX2 RY2 RZ2
K2 - Specifies the yield stiffness of a bilinear restraint. When the load on the restraint
exceeds Fy, the stiffness on the restraint changes from K1 to K2. Type a negative value to
model shallow trench or groove-type pipeline supports. CAESAR II treats K2 values of zero
as rigid. Type 1.0 for very small stiffnesses.
TYPE = XSPR YSPR ZSPR
"x" - Specifies the distance traveled along the spring axis before bottom-out occurs. In the
case of a typical YSPR, this is the movement in the negative Y direction before the spring
bottoms out.
TYPE = XSNB YSNB ZSNB
Stif
Specifies stiffness associated with any support, guide, limit stop, rod, or spring that can be
defined as a restraint. If you leave this option blank then the defined restraint is considered
rigid. The default rigid restraint stiffness is 1.0E12.
K1 is the initial stiffness of a bilinear restraint (for example, X2). If the restraint is not rigid,
then you can type any positive stiffness.
Avoid stiffnesses greatly in excess of 1.0E15. If a stiffness value is specified for an anchor,
the stiffness applies for all six degrees of freedom at the anchored node.

Mu
Specifies the following values:
TYPE = X Y Z GUI LIM
MU - Specifies the static friction coefficient. Friction provides resistance to movement along
the direction normal to the restraint line of action. The magnitude of the friction force is equal
to MU * Fn, where Fn is the normal force on the restraint. You can automatically assign a
friction coefficient to every new translational restraint by assigning a value to the Coefficient
of Friction box in the configuration. For more information, see Coefficient of Friction (Mu)
(on page 53).
TYPE = XROD YROD ZROD
Fi - Specifies the initial spring load. Leave this box blank for a rigid YROD. If you use YROD
to model a spring hanger, type the hanger stiffness into the STIF box. Type the initial cold
load on the hanger.
TYPE = X2 Y2 Z2 RX2 RY2 RZ2
Fy - Specifies the yield load. If the load on the support is less than Fy then the initial
stiffness K1 is used. If the load on the support is greater than Fy then the second stiffness
K2 is used.
TYPE = XSPR YSPR ZSPR
F - Specifies the initial spring cold load. This input is required and is almost always positive.
TYPE = XSNB YSNB ZSNB
na - Not Applicable. This box is not used when the restraint TYPE is snubber.
Hangers
Indicates that you are supplying hanger data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Hangers on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box controls options for hanger installations. You can fully define the hanger
data, or the hanger can be designed by CAESAR II. In this case, two special load cases are run
and the results are used as design parameters to select the springs from the user-specified
catalog.
CAESAR II provides catalogs for more than 35 spring hanger vendors.
The Hangers auxiliary dialog box lets you specify details on a hanger-by-hanger basis in the
piping input. To specify values for all hangers in a model, see Hanger Design Control Data (on
page 262).

Any changes you type in the Hangers auxiliary dialog box override the global values you
specify in the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.

Node
Specifies the node number to which the hanger is connected.
CNode
Specifies the connecting node number. This value is used only when the other end of the
hanger is to be connected to another point in the system, such as another pipe node.
Design Data
There are two sections on the Hanger auxiliary dialog box.
Design Data - Specifies the hanger data if you need CAESAR II to design the hanger for
you.
Predefined Hanger Data - Specifies the hanger data if you know the hanger information.
Hanger Table
Specifies the active hanger table.
The following spring tables are currently included in CAESAR II:
1. Anvil 2. Bergen Power
3. Power Piping 4. NPS Industries
5. Lisega 6. Fronek
7. Piping Technology 8. Capitol
9. Piping Services 10. Basic Engineers
11. Inoflex 12. E. Myatt & Co.
13. Sinopec 14. BHEL
15. CASTIM 2000 (formerly Flexider) 16. Carpenter & Paterson
17. Pipe Supports Ltd. 18. Witzenmann
19. Sarathi 20. Myricks
21. China Power 22. Pipe Supports USA
23. Quality Pipe Supports 24. PiHASA
25. Binder 26. Gradior

27. NHK 28. PSSI GmbH
29. Seonghwa 30. Mitsubishi
31. Yamashita 32. Sanwa Tekki
33. Techno Industry 34. Hesterberg
35. Spring Supports Mfg. Co. 36. Senior
37. Unison 38. Wookwang
Additional design options are invoked if you use the following check boxes.
Extended Range
Cold Load
Hot load centered (if possible)
You can globally set the hanger data for a model from the Hanger Design Control Data
dialog box (see "Hanger Design Control Data" on page 262), accessed by clicking Hanger
design criteria in the piping input. Specify the default hanger table that appears in this
dialog by specifying the Default Spring Hanger Table configuration setting in
Configuration Editor > Database Definitions. For examples of incorporating spring
hanger designs into your models, see the Hangers section in the CAESAR II Application
Guide.
Extended Load Range Springs - CAESAR II includes the maximum load range to permit
the selection of less expensive variable support hangers in place of constant effort supports
when the spring loads are just outside the manufacturers recommended range. Extended
load ranges are the most extreme ranges on the spring load table. Some manufacturers
build double-spring supports to accommodate this range. Others adjust the top or bottom
travel limits to accommodate either end of the extended table. Make sure that the
manufacturer can supply the spring before you use the maximum ranges. Use of the
extended range often eliminates the need to go to a constant effort support.
Lisega springs do not support an extended range. If you select Extended Range for
a hanger with Lisega springs, CAESAR II returns the standard Lisega spring table and
ranges.
Cold Load Spring Hanger Design - Cold load spring hanger design is a method of
designing the springs in which the hot (or operating) load is supported in the cold (or
installed) position of the piping. This method of spring design offers several
advantages over the more usual hot load design:
Hanger stops are easier to remove.
There is no excessive movement from the neutral position when the system is cold
or when the stops are removed.
Spring loads can be adjusted before the system is brought up to temperature.
Some feel that the cold load approach yields a much more dependable design.
Operating loads on connected equipment are lower in some system configurations.
A hot vertical riser anchored at the bottom turning horizontally into a nozzle

connection is a typical configuration resulting in this load-reduction. The spring to be

designed is at the elbow adjacent to the nozzle. Operating loads are lower because
the difference between the hot and cold loads counters the moment produced by
the vertical thermal expansion from the anchor.
The disadvantages to cold load design are:
In some systems, the loads on rotating equipment may be increased by a value
proportional to the spring rate times the travel in the hot condition.
Most installations are done on a hot load design basis.
Middle of the Table Hanger Design (Hot Load Centered) - Many designers prefer that the
hot load be centered as closely as possible to the middle of the spring table. This provides
as much variability as possible in both directions before the spring bottoms out when the
system is hot. This design was necessary prior to effective computer modeling of piping
systems, when the weights at hangers were approximated by chart methods or calculated
by hand. Activating this option does not guarantee that spring hot loads are at the middle of
the spring table, but CAESAR II makes every effort to move the hot load to this position. The
CAESAR II design algorithm goes to a higher size spring if the design load is closer to the
middle of the larger spring's range, but never switches spring types. This option, when it is
effective, can only result in a one-size larger spring. CAESAR II attempts to move the hot
load to the next higher spring when it is within 10% of the maximum travel range for the
spring. If the new spring is not satisfactory, then CAESAR II uses the old one.
Available Space (neg. for can)

Specifies the amount of room above or below the pipe where you can install the hanger or
can. If the value is negative, then CAESAR II assumes that a can is to be installed. If the
value is positive, then CAESAR II assumes that a hanger is to be in installed. Hangers or
cans are selected for a particular location only if they can be installed in the space allotted.
The precise definition of available space varies with the manufacturer. Drawings and tables
for each manufacturer are shown at the end of this section.

This is the available vertical clearance for the hanger or can:
Leave the box blank or set to zero if the Available Space is not an important design criteria.
When the available space is the governing factor in a hanger design, several smaller springs
are typically chosen in place of one large spring.
Allowable Load Variation (%)

Specifies the limit on the allowed variation between the hot and cold hanger loads. If this
value is not specified, the only limit on load variation is that inherent in the spring table. This
is approximately 100% when the hot load is smaller than the cold load and 50% when the
hot load is larger than the cold load. Hot loads are smaller than cold loads whenever the
operating displacement in the Y direction is positive. The default value for the load variation
is 25%.
The Allowable Load Variation value is the percentage variation from the hot load:

or as may be more familiar:
The Allowable Load Variation value is typed as a percentage. For example, type twenty
five percent as 25.0.
Rigid Support Displacement Criteria

Specifies the minimum amount of travel for hanger design. This is a cost saving feature that
replaces unnecessary springs with rigid rods.
The hanger design algorithm operates by first running a restrained weight case. The load to
be supported by the hanger in the operating condition is determined from this case. After the
hanger design load is known, the software runs an operating case with the hot hanger load
installed. This analysis determines the travel at the hanger location. If this determined
hanger travel is less than the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria, then a rigid Y-support
is selected instead of a spring for the location.
The software does not apply the criteria if you leave the Rigid Support Displacement
Criteria box blank or zero.
A typical value is 0.1 in.
You should insert a single directional restraint instead of a rigid rod in some
cases. Rigid rods are double-acting restraints. In some cases these can develop large hold
down forces that do not really exist because the support has lifted off, or because the rigid
rod has bowed slightly. When this condition develops, you should rerun the hanger design
inserting single directional restraints where rigid rods were put in by CAESAR II.
Do not replace hangers with rigid rods in very stiff parts of the piping system. These parts
are usually associated with rotating equipment or vessel nozzles that need to be protected.
Maximum Allowed Travel Limit

Specifies the maximum amount of travel for hanger design. CAESAR II selects a constant
effort support if the design operating travel exceeds this limit, even though a variable
support from the manufacturer table would have been satisfactory in every other respect.
You can design a constant effort hanger by specifying a very small number for the
Maximum Allowed Travel Limit. A value of 0.001 typically forces CAESAR II to select a
constant effort support for a particular location.

No. Hangers at Location

Specifies the number of hangers at a location.
Type a positive number to indicate the exact number of hangers at that location.
Leave the box blank to indicate that CAESAR II can place as many hangers as necessary to
make the installation work.
Type a negative number to indicate the maximum number of hangers that you accept. For
example, if you want to use as few springs as possible, yet are willing to use as many as 5
springs if necessary, type -5 in the No. of Hangers at Location box.
Allow Short Range Springs

Indicates that hanger design allows short range springs.
CAESAR II gives you the option of excluding short range springs from consideration from
the selection algorithms. Short range springs are considered specialty items in some
instances and are not used unless their shorter length is required for clearance reasons.
Clear this check box in this case.
If this option is not selected, CAESAR II selects a mid-range spring over a short-range
spring, assuming that they are more standard, readily available, and in general cheaper than
their short-range counterparts.
If the default should be that short range springs are used wherever possible, then check the
box on the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.
Operating Load (Total at Loc.)

Overrides the operating load that CAESAR II is calculating.
This value is normally specified when you think that loads on a piece of equipment are
reduced if a hanger in the vicinity of the equipment is artificially caused to carry a
proportionately larger part of the total load. This operating load is the hot load that the
hanger is designed to support after it undergoes any travel due to the thermal expansion of
the piping. CAESAR II's calculated hanger operating loads may be read from the hanger
table printed in the output processor. The column is titled HOT LOAD. The value also
appears in this table. Type the total operating load that you want to use at the location. For
example, if there are two hangers specified at the location and each should carry 500 lb.,
then the operating load specified should be 1,000 lb.

Hanger Hardware Weight

Specifies any additional weight that must be supported by the hanger that exists between
the hanger and the pipe. This weight could affect the hanger design if the magnitude of this
weight is great enough.
Multiple Load Case Design Option

Specifies the load case for hanger design. You can base the spring selection algorithm on
one or more operating conditions. A two-pump installation where only one pump operates at
a time is a good application for multiple load case hanger design.
There are currently thirteen different multiple load case design algorithms available:
Design spring per operating case #1.
Design spring per operating case #2.
Design spring per operating case #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, #8, and #9.
Design spring for maximum operating load.
Design spring for maximum travel.
Design spring for average load and average travel.
Design spring for maximum load and maximum travel.
You can specify the Multiple Load Case Design option at the global level on the Hanger
Design Control Data dialog box. The globally specified option applies for all hanger design
locations unless overridden on a specific hanger design dialog box.
Type the number of operating thermal cases to consider when sizing springs for this system
on the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box. This value defaults to 1.0. Also type the
Multiple Load Case Design option to be the default value unless the design option is to be
specified individually for each hanger to be designed in the system.

Example Problem: Multiple Load - Case Spring - Hanger Design

This example illustrates the different hanger designs that can result from the use of different
multiple load case design options.

Multiple Load Case Design Option for Hanger Design
Hanger A
Multiple Load Case Design Hanger Travel Design Hanger Load

Design Option
1 0.752 in 730.0 lb
2 0.029 in 560.0 lb
10 0.752 in 730.0 lb
11 0.752 in 730.0 lb
12 0.3905 in 645.0 lb
13 0.752 in 730.0 lb

Hanger B
Multiple Load Case Design Hanger Travel Design Hanger Load

Design Option
1 0.032 in 592.0 lb
2 0.733 in 587.0 lb
10 0.032 in 592.0 lb
11 0.733 in 587.0 lb
12 0.3825 in 589.5 lb
13 0.733 in 592.0 lb
Free Restraint at Node

Specifies the node number for the equipment where the restraint is freed. You can also
specify the corresponding free code to tell CAESAR II which of the restraint or anchor
directions to free. For nozzles that are further removed from the hanger usually only the Y
direction should be freed. Anchors or restraints simulating equipment connections that are in
the immediate vicinity of the hanger are usually freed during the hanger design restrained
weight run so that loads normally going to the equipment nozzle are carried by the hanger.
Hangers are commonly used around equipment nozzles to support the weight of the pipe as
it thermally expands away from the nozzle. The hanger can usually be designed to take
almost the full weight of the pipe between the anchor and the hanger if the anchor is freed
when making the restrained weight calculation. The pipe going to the anchor is treated just
like a free end, but only for the hanger weight calculation only.
The Free Restraint at Node box works in conjunction with the Free Code box. If the Free
Code is not specified for an anchor, then the software assumes that the anchor is
completely free for the restrained weight run.
The restrained Weight hanger design pass is the first analysis step in the hanger design. It

is run automatically by CAESAR II. The following steps comprise the restrained weight run:
1. Putting rigid Y restraints at each hanger location.
2. Removing anchors and restraints that are to be freed.
3. Running the weight analysis to find the hot hanger loads.
Nonlinear restraints are not freed during hanger design.
Free Code
Specifies the directions in which the anchor or restraint is released. When an anchor or
restraint should be released for the restrained weight run, type the node number for that
anchor in the Free Restraint at Node box and specify the free code describing the
directions to be released in the Free Code box on the same hanger dialog box. The
available free codes are as follows:
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y direction only.
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and X directions only.
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and Z directions only.
Free all translational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint. (X,Y, and Z)
Free all translational and rotational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint.
(X, Y, Z, RX, RY, and RZ)
The last option usually results in the highest adjacent hanger loads, but you should only use
that option when the horizontal distance between the hanger and the anchor is within about
4 pipe diameters.
Predefined Hanger Data

Specifies predefined hanger data. When you use the Predefined Hanger Data section on
the hanger dialog box and there is more than one hanger at the location, use the No. of
Hangers at Location box in the Design Data section to specify the number of hangers.
Then, type the spring rate and pre-load applicable to a single hanger. There is no reason to
try to compute the equivalent spring rates or theoretical loads.
Pre-defined hanger data can be specified in one of two ways:
Specify all information for the hanger.
Specify only the spring rate for the hanger.
If you specify all of the information, and the restraint configuration for the node is completely
defined, then it is not included in the hanger design algorithm.
For a position to be completely pre-defined, one of the following conditions must apply:
Spring rate and theoretical cold load
Constant effort support load

Spring Rate
Specifies the spring rate.
Theoretical Cold (Installation) Load

Specifies the cold load for the hanger. If you type both the spring rate and the cold load, the
hanger location is completely predefined and CAESAR II does not perform analysis level
design for the hanger.
Resetting Loads on Existing Spring Hangers

If only the spring rate is given, CAESAR II assumes that you want to rerate the spring at the
given location. The software reads the old spring rate from the existing hanger and inputs it
directly to CAESAR II. Leave the Theoretical Cold Load box blank for the rerate. If more
than a single spring exists at the location, then type the total number of springs in the No. of
Hangers at Location box in the Design Data section. CAESAR II assumes that the load is
distributed evenly among multiple springs at the same point.
CAESAR II goes through its normal hanger design procedure to calculate the load and
travel for all proposed hanger locations including the location with springs to be reset. The
stiffness of the reset springs is not used for this redesign. After CAESAR II sizes the springs,
it makes a comparison with the user-defined spring rates. If the selected spring rate is within
5% of your existing spring rate, CAESAR II lists the spring's figure number and size in the
output report. If the selected spring rate is more than 5% of your value, no manufacturer's
data is listed. In either case, CAESAR II uses the spring rate that you typed in all following
analyses. It is up to you to confirm that the new hot and cold loads are within the existing
spring's working range.
The primary use of the rerate capability is to find new installed loads for old springs. Springs
might be rerated after the shutdown of a unit that has been operating continuously for a long
period, or after mechanical or process changes are made to a piping system.
Constant Effort Support Load

Specifies the support load for the constant effort hanger.
Nozzles
Indicates that you are supplying nozzle data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Nozzle Flex on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls options for flexible nozzle connections. When you type
values in this dialog box tab, CAESAR II automatically calculates the flexibilities and adds them
to the active element. CAESAR II calculates nozzle loads according to WRC 297, API 650 or BS
5500 criteria.

WRC 297
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to WRC 297.
When you type a nozzle node number, CAESAR II scans the current input data for the node and
fills the corresponding diameter and wall thickness in the Nozzle Outer Diameter and Nozzle
Wall Thickness boxes.
Current nozzle flexibility calculations are in accordance with the Welding Research Council
Bulletin No. 297, issued August 1984 for cylinder-to-cylinder intersections.
A valid nozzle node has the following properties:
Only a single element connects to the nozzle node.
The nozzle node is not restrained and does not have displacements specified for any of its
degrees of freedom.
Computed nozzle flexibilities are automatically included in the piping system analysis through
software-generated restraints. This generation is completely automatic. Six restraints are
established for each flexible nozzle input.

If you define a vessel node number, then the vessel node acts like a connecting node for each
of the six restraints. Vessel nodes are subject to the same restrictions shown above for nozzle
nodes.
You should not put a restrainer on an element between the nozzle node and any
specified vessel node. CAESAR II creates the required connectivity from the nozzle flexibility
data and any user-generated stiffnesses between these two points erroneously add to the
nozzle stiffnesses.
After the error checking, CAESAR II displays all useful WRC curve data on the Errors and
Warnings dialog box. You can use these values to define the illustrated nozzles in the WRC
297 bulletin. It is sometimes helpful to know just how close a particular nozzle is to one of the
several asymptotic limits, or to a curve boundary.
You can see the WRC 297 computed data only during the error checking process.

Nozzle Node
Specifies the node number located at the nozzle intersection with the vessel shell. There
should only be a single piping element connected to this node. There should be no restraints
acting on the node. The nozzle element must be perpendicular to the vessel shell.
You can model hillside nozzles and latrolets. To do this, the first (and possibly very short)
nozzle element that comes from the vessel must be perpendicular to the vessel to keep the
local stiffness properly oriented. The second, longer nozzle element can then go off on the
true centerline of the nozzle.
Vessel Node (Optional)

Specifies the node number on the vessel surface at the point where the nozzle intersects
the vessel shell. This is optional. If you do not specify this value, then the nozzle node is
connected by the stiffnesses to a point fixed rigidly in space. If you specify this value, then
the nozzle node is connected by the stiffnesses to the vessel node. Specify the vessel
nodes when you want to model through the vessel from the nozzle connection to the skirt or
foundation.
Nozzle Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the nozzle. CAESAR II fills this field automatically using
the corresponding pipe diameter. You can override this value because it does not have to be
equal to the diameter of the pipe used to model the nozzle.
Nozzle Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the nozzle. CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the
corresponding pipe wall thickness. You can override this value because it does not have to
be equal to the wall thickness of the pipe element used to model the nozzle.
Vessel Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the vessel.

Vessel Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the vessel at the point where the nozzle connects to the
vessel. Do not include the thickness of any reinforcing pad.
Vessel Pad Thickness

Specifies the thickness of any reinforcing pad at the nozzle. This thickness is added to the
vessel wall thickness before the software performs nozzle stiffness calculations.
Distance to Stiffener or Head

Specifies the distance along the vessel center-line from the center of the nozzle opening in
the vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel that significantly stiffens the
vessel's cross-section against local deformation normal to the shell surface.
Distance to Opposite Stiffener

Specifies the distance along the vessel center line from the center of the nozzle opening in
the vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel in the opposite direction from
the previous one. This entry is ignored for spherical vessels.
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX, VY, VZ

Specifies the direction vector or direction cosines which defines the center-line of the vessel.
For example, a vertical vessel in a Y-up coordinate system, these entries would read:
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX - <blank>
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VY - 1.0
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VZ - <blank>
If the centerlines of the nozzle and vessel are collinear, CAESAR II flags this as an
error.
Vessel Temperature (Optional)

Specifies the estimated temperature of the vessel or nozzle junction. If you type this value,
you must also type a valid vessel material number in the corresponding field. The software
uses the estimated temperature to calculate the hot modulus-of-elasticity.

Vessel Material (Optional)

Specifies the vessel material number. If you type this value, you must pair the vessel
material number with a valid vessel temperature. The allowed vessel material number can
be any valid material number from the material database. This value corresponds to the pipe
materials used in the dialog box. If the vessel temperature and the vessel material number
are left blank or zero, then the software uses an elastic modulus of 29.0E6 psi.
API 650
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to API 650.
CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to Appendix P of API 650, "Design of
Carbon Steel Atmospheric Oil Storage Tanks."

Nozzle Node
Tank Node (optional)

Specifies the node number on the tank surface at the point where the nozzle intersects the
tank shell.
This is optional. If you do not specify one, then the nozzle node is connected by the
stiffnesses to a point fixed rigidly in space. If you type this value, then the nozzle node is
connected by the stiffnesses to the tank node.
Specify the tank node when you want to model through the tank from the nozzle connection
to the foundation.

Nozzle Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the nozzle. CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the
corresponding pipe wall thickness. You can override this value because it does not have to
be equal to the wall thickness of the pipe element used to model the nozzle.
Tank Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the storage tank. API 650 Addendum 1 does not
recommend these computations for diameters less than 120 feet.

Tank Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the storage tank at the point where the nozzle connects to the
tank. Do not include the thickness of any reinforcing pad.
Reinforcing on Shell (1) or Nozzle (2)

Specifies whether the reinforcing is on the shell or on the nozzle. If the reinforcing is on the
shell, then type 1. If it is on the nozzle, type 2.
Nozzle Height
Specifies the height from the centerline of the nozzle to the base of the tank.
Fluid Height
Specifies the liquid level of the fluid in the storage tank. This value must be greater than the
nozzle height.
Fluid SG
Specifies the specific gravity of the stored liquid. This value is unitless.
Tank Coefficient of Thermal Expansion

Specifies the coefficient of thermal expansion of the plate material of the tank. Values are
listed in engineering handbooks or the appropriate section of the API 650, App P. If this
value is left blank, the software assumes a value of zero.
Temperature Change
Specifies the change in temperature from ambient to the maximum that the tank normally
experiences. For example, if the maximum summertime temperature is 107F, then the
temperature change would be 107 70 = 37, where 70 is the default ambient temperature
defined in configuration and environment. You would type 37 in this box. If this value is left
blank, the software assumes a value of zero.

Tank Modulus of Elasticity

Specifies the hot modulus-of-elasticity for the tank. If this value is left blank, the software
assumes a value of 0.2950E+08.
Set Displacement Vector

Specifies the displacement vector to assign to the calculated displacements. If you select
one among D1 to D9, the calculated displacements become the boundary conditions of the
current job, and CAESAR II can use them for the stress analysis. If you have already
specified displacements on the Classic Piping Input dialog box, CAESAR II uses the
calculated displacements to replace the original displacements. If you select None,
CAESAR II does not use the calculated displacements for the stress analysis.
PD 5500
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to PD 5500.
CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to Appendix G of the PD 5500
Specification for Unfired Fusion Welded Pressure Vessels.

Nozzle Node
Vessel Node (Optional)

Specifies the node number on the vessel surface at the point where the nozzle intersects
the vessel shell. This is optional. If you do not specify this value, then the nozzle node is
connected by the stiffnesses to a point fixed rigidly in space. If you specify this value, then
the nozzle node is connected by the stiffnesses to the vessel node. Specify the vessel
nodes when you want to model through the vessel from the nozzle connection to the skirt or
foundation.
Vessel Type - Cylinder (0) or Sphere (1)

Indicates whether the vessel is cylindrical or spherical.
Type 0 if the vessel is cylindrical. For cylinders, the distances to stiffeners or heads and the
vessel direction cosines are required.
Type 1 if the vessel is spherical. For spheres, the boxes for the distances to stiffeners or
heads and vessel direction cosines are ignored.

Vessel Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the vessel.

Vessel Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the vessel at the point where the nozzle connects to the
vessel. Do not include the thickness of any reinforcing pad.
Vessel Pad Thickness

Specifies the thickness of any reinforcing pad at the nozzle. This thickness is added to the
vessel wall thickness before the software performs nozzle stiffness calculations.
Distance to Stiffener or Head

Specifies the distance along the vessel center-line from the center of the nozzle opening in
the vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel that significantly stiffens the
vessel's cross-section against local deformation normal to the shell surface.
Distance to Opposite Stiffener

Specifies the distance along the vessel center line from the center of the nozzle opening in
the vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel in the opposite direction from
the previous one. This entry is ignored for spherical vessels.
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX, VY, VZ

Specifies the direction vector or direction cosines which defines the center-line of the vessel.
For example, a vertical vessel in a Y-up coordinate system, these entries would read:
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX - <blank>
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VY - 1.0
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VZ - <blank>
If the centerlines of the nozzle and vessel are collinear, CAESAR II flags this as an
error.
Vessel Temperature (Optional)

Specifies the estimated temperature of the vessel or nozzle junction. If you type this value,
you must also type a valid vessel material number in the corresponding field. The software
uses the estimated temperature to calculate the hot modulus-of-elasticity.

Vessel Material (Optional)

Specifies the vessel material number. If you type this value, you must pair the vessel
material number with a valid vessel temperature. The allowed vessel material number can
be any valid material number from the material database. This value corresponds to the pipe
materials used in the dialog box. If the vessel temperature and the vessel material number
are left blank or zero, then the software uses an elastic modulus of 29.0E6 psi.
Displacements
Indicates that you are supplying displacement data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Displacements on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls imposed displacements for up to two nodes for each
element. If a displacement value is entered for any vector, this direction is considered to be fixed
for any other nonspecified vectors.
Leaving a direction blank for all nine vectors models the system as free to move in that
direction. Specify 0.0 to indicate that the system is fully restrained in that direction.

Node
Specifies the node number where the displacement is defined. Do not place a restraint at
this node.
Vector 1, Vector 2, ... Vector 9

Specifies the six components of the displacements for a vector. You can type as many as
nine vectors, corresponding to nine operating temperatures. The six components of a vector
are for six degrees of freedom along global X, Y and Z directions. If you leave any field
blank, that degree of freedom is free.
If an imposed displacement is specified for a specific degree-of-freedom, then that

degree-of-freedom is considered restrained for all load cases whether or not they
contain that displacement set.
You can import displacements into the CAESAR II model from a file. For more
information, see Import/Export Displacements from File (on page 364).
Flange Checks
Indicates that you are supplying flange data to evaluate an in-line flange. Select or clear this
option by double-clicking the Flange check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
You can read the values for the Flange Class/Grade and Gasket Diameter, G boxes from a file
if you select ASME - 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are
located in the ASME-2003.G text file in the system folder under the application data folder.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the flanges in a
model, specify the operating temperature at which the software evaluates the flanges in the
Flange Analysis Temperature box on the Load Cases tab of the Static Analysis - Load
Case Editor.
Flange evaluation can be performed for individual load cases and for ABS and MAX load
combination cases. For more information, see Combination Method (on page 550).

From, To, Both

Specifies whether the flange is on the From end, the To end, or both ends of the element.
Specifies whether to evaluate the flanges using the Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method
or the ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 method.
Peq
Evaluate the flanges using the Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method.
Peq = 16M/()G3 + 4F/()G2 + PD Pressure Rating
Where:
Peq = equivalent pressure (for checking against flange rating)
M = bending moment on flange
G = diameter of effective gasket reaction
F = axial force on flange
PD = design pressure
NC-3658.3
Evaluate the flanges using the ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 method.
S = 36,000 * Mfs / (CAb * 3125) Min(Sy, 36000) non-occasional load case
S = 36,000 * Mfd / (CAb * 3125) 2.0 * Min(Sy, 36000) occasional load case
Where (note that the constants 36,000 and 3125 should be 248.22 and 21.6 in standard SI
units):
S = flange stress
Mfs = bending or torsional moment (whichever is greater) acting on the flange,
developed during a non-occasional load case
Mfd = bending or torsional moment (whichever is greater) acting on the flange,
developed during an occasional load case
Sy = yield strength of flange material at design temperature; (where Sy, given in psi,
shall not be taken as greater than 36,000 psi)
C = bolt circle diameter
Ab = total cross sectional area of bolts
PD = design pressure

Read from File

Displays the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. Click this button to read
Temperature-Pressure Rating data from a file (ASME and DIN flanges are shipped with
CAESAR II).
As an alternative to reading from a file, you can type the data directly into the table.
You can create your own data files by following the format described in the CAESAR II
documentation.
Values for both Flange Class/Grade and Gasket Diameter, G can be read from a file if you
select ASME 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are in the
text file ASME-2003.G located in the system folder of your application data directory.
Flange Class/Grade
Displays the flange class and material grade. Typically, flanges are identified by pressure
class and material grade, but you can type anything in this box. If the flange
Temperature-Pressure Rating data is read in from a file, then CAESAR II automatically
builds a flange name made up of the File Name, the Pressure Class, and the Material
Class.
Gasket Diameter, G / Bolt Circle

Displays the gasket diameter. Values for Gasket Diameter, G can be read from a file if you
select ASME 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are in the
text file ASME-2003.G located in the system folder of your application data directory. This
box does double duty depending on which analysis technique is active.
Peq Method:
Specify the diameter at the location of the gasket load reaction. From ASME Section VIII,
Division 1, Appendix 2, (except as noted in sketch (1) of Fig 2-4), G is defined as (see Table
2-5.2):
when b0 is less than or equal to 1/4, G equals the mean diameter of the gasket
contact face
when b0 is greater than 1/4, G equals the outside diameter of the gasket contact
face less 2b.
When using the Peq method with the Stoomwezen Piping Code, use the bolt circle
diameter instead of the gasket load reaction diameter (see chapter D0701 of the Code
RToD). The results of this Peq Method are considered by Stoomwezen to be conservative.
NC-3658 Method:
Specify the bolt circle diameter. This value is the diameter of the circle that passes through
the bolt centers.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the
flanges in a model, specify the operating temperature at which the software evaluates the
flanges in the Flange Analysis Temperature box on the Load Cases tab of the Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor.

Temperature-Pressure Table
Specifies temperature and pressure values. Use this table to define the flange
Temperature-Pressure rating as a function of temperature for a particular material grade.
You can type up to 24 temperature-pressure pairs. These values must be typed in
ascending temperature order.
Bolt Area (Ab)

Specifies the total cross-sectional area of the bolts at the root of thread or the section of
least diameter under stress.
Flange Yield Strength, SYC, SY1-SY9

Specifies the flange yield stress at the cold (ambient) temperature and at each of the
operating temperatures, for use in calculating the flange allowable stress.
Nozzle Lmt Check

Indicates that you are supplying equipment data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Nozzle Lmt Check check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Equipment nozzle evaluation is one of the most important tasks in analyzing a piping system.
The various nozzle loads, when subjected to the operating criteria of the piping system, must be
less than their associated allowable loads. Verification of the nozzle loads is a time consuming
task, which cannot be performed until the pipe stress requirements are met.
CAESAR II enables you to define overall nozzle limits. This permits CAESAR II to perform a first
pass screening. Actual detailed nozzle evaluation can then be focused on those nozzles that fail
this initial screening.

To illustrate this procedure, consider the limits defined for a nozzle displayed below:
The data above specifies the nozzle limits and how the resulting loads (from the analysis) are
compared to the limits. After the analysis has been performed and the results are available, you
can select the specific load case the nozzle must be evaluated against as well as the Nozzle
Check report. For more information on the Nozzle Check report see the Equipment Report.
Nozzle Limit Check is a first pass at qualifying the equipment nozzles. This is a simple
check based on the limits defined on this dialog box. This screening is not a substitute for the
more rigorous checks of the actual equipment standards.

Node
Specifies the node number representing the equipment nozzle to be checked. The node
should have a restraint or a displacement in the CAESAR II model, because this node
represents an equipment nozzle.
Comparison Method
Specifies the method used to compare the actual nozzle loads to the defined limits.
Available choices are:
Absolute - Each load is compared directly to the corresponding limit. That is, FX to
FX_allowable, FY to FY_allowable, and so on.
|Fa| |Fal|
|Fb| Fbl|
|Fc| |Fcl|
|Ma| |Mal|
|Mb| |Mbl|
|Mc| |Mcl|
SRSS - The square root sum of the squares (SRSS) of each load divided by the
corresponding allowable is compared to 1.0.
Forces
and
Moments
Unity Check - The sum of the three forces and three moments, each divided by
their respective allowables is compared to 1.0.
and

Ref Vector X, Y, Z
Specifies the three components or direction cosines of the reference vector. The reference
vector is used with the current element orientation to define the local coordinate system
ABC for this equipment check. See Axis B, in the Forces - Moments (on page 193) fields.
The vector must be perpendicular to the current pipe element. This vector need not be unity.
Examples:
( 0, 1, 0 ) - the reference vector is in the global "Y" direction
( 1, 0, 0 ) - the reference vector is in the global "X" direction
( 0.7071, 0, 0.7071 ) - the reference vector is skewed 45 degrees in the global X-Z
plane.
Read from File

Displays the Open dialog box. Select a file (some files are shipped with CAESAR II) and
read force and moment data into the Forces - Moments fields. Alternatively, you can enter
the data directly into the fields.
Forces - Moments
Specifies the three components of the force and the three components of the moment for
the load limits. The load limits are based on the local coordinate system ABC, where: axis A
is defined by the current element (From to To is positive), axis B is defined by the reference
vector, and axis C is the cross product of A and B (the right hand rule). For more information
on the use of these limits (Fal, Fbl, Fcl, Mal, Mbl, Mcl), see Comparison Method (on page
192).
A - Pipe/nozzle axis
B - Major equipment axis (the longitudinal direction of a vessel, or the pump shaft
direction.)
C - Other perpendicular direction.
Loading Conditions
The check boxes in this block allow you to define loadings acting on the pipe. These loads may
be individual forces or moments acting at discrete points, distributed uniform loads (which can
be specified on force per unit length, or gravitational body forces), or wind loadings (wind
loadings are entered by specifying a wind shape factorthe loads themselves are specified
when building the load cases. The uniform load and the wind shape factor check boxes are
unchecked on subsequent input screens. This does not mean that the loads were removed from
these elements; instead, this implies that the loads do not change on subsequent screens.
You can specify uniform loads in g-values by setting a parameter in the Special
Execution Options. For more information, see Configuration and Environment (on page 48).

Forces/Moments
Indicates that you are supplying force and moment data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Forces/Moments check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary database tab controls imposed forces or moments for up to two nodes per
element. You can use up to nine force vectors.
Node
Specifies the node number where the forces and moments act.
Vector 1, Vector 2, ... Vector 9

Specifies the three components of the force and the three components of the moment for a
vector. You can type as many as nine vectors. The components of the force and the
moment are along the global X, Y, and Z directions.
Uniform Loads
Indicates that you are supplying uniform load data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Uniform Loads check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary database tab controls up to three uniform load vectors. These uniform loads are
applied to the entire current element, as well as all subsequent elements in the model, until
explicitly changed or zeroed out.

The uniform load data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you
change it.
Assuming uniform loading in F/L, a snow load of 8.0 pounds per foot (assuming units of pounds
per inch in a Y-up coordinate system) could be specified as follows:
Vector 1 Vector 2 Vector 3
Y -8/12
or may be specified:
Vector 1 Vector 2 Vector 3
Y -.6667
Assuming uniform load in Gs, your entries of X = 1.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0 represent a 1.0g load on
the piping system in the horizontal X direction. Your entries of X = 0.0, Y = -1.0, Z = 0.0
represent a 1.0g load in the minus Y direction, and is exactly equal to the pipe weight load in
Y-up coordinate system.
Uniform load in Gs is used most often for static earthquake loadings.
You can activate uniform loads in Gs by selecting the Uniform load in Gs check box
using the Environment > Special Execution Parameters command on the Classic Piping
Input dialog box.

Vector 1, Vector 2, Vector 3

Specifies the three components of the uniform load for a vector. You can type as many as
three vectors. The components of the uniform load are along the global X, Y, and Z
directions. The uniform load is either in terms of force per unit length or in terms of a
magnifier of gravitational loading (G).
in G's, in F/L
Indicates the unit of the uniform load.
Wind / Wave Loads

Indicates that you are supplying environmental load data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Wind/Wave check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab indicates whether this portion of the pipe is exposed to wind or
wave loading. The pipe cannot be exposed to both.
Selecting Wind exposes the pipe to wind loading; selecting Wave exposes the pipe to wave,
current, and buoyancy loadings; selecting Off turns off both types of loading.
This dialog box tab is also used to specify the Wind Shape Factor when Wind is specified. The
dialog box tab is used to specify various wave coefficients when Wave is specified. The
software automatically computes the wave coefficients if you leave these boxes blank.
Entries on this auxiliary dialog box tab apply to all subsequent piping, until changed on a later
element.
Specific wind and wave load cases are built using the Static Load Case Editor.

Wind Loads
Indicates that you are supplying wind load data.
Wind load data is distributive and applies to the current and all following elements until you
change it.
Wind Shape Factor

Specifies the coefficient as defined in ASCE 7 in Figure 6-21 for chimneys, tanks, and
similar structure. A value of 0.5 to 0.65 is typically used for cylindrical sections. Activating
the wind option activates the Wind Load Input tab, which is accessed from the Load Case
Editor during static analysis.
Refer to the respective wind code standard for the applicable wind shape factor,
specific to that code.

Wave Loads
Indicates that you are supplying wave load data.
Wave load data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you change
it.
Drag Coefficient, Cd
Specifies the drag coefficient as recommended by API RP2A. Typical values range from 0.6
to 1.20. Type 0.0 to calculate the drag coefficient based on particle velocities.
Added Mass Coefficient, Ca

Specifies the added mass coefficient. This coefficient accounts for the added mass of fluid
entrained into the pipe. Typical values range from 0.5 to 1.0. Type 0.0 to calculate the added
mass coefficient based on particle velocities.
Lift Coefficient, Cl
Specifies the lift coefficient. This coefficient accounts for wave lift which is the force
perpendicular to both the element axis and the particle velocity vector. Type a value of 0.0 to
calculate the added lift coefficient based on particle velocities.
Marine Growth
Specifies the thickness of any marine growth adhering to the external pipe wall. The
software increases the pipe diameter experiencing wave loading by twice this value.
Marine Growth Density

Specifies the density used if you are including the weight of the marine growth in the pipe

weight. If you leave this box blank, the software ignores the weight of the marine growth.
Off
Indicates that you do not want wind or wave loads on the current element and all following
elements until you change it.
Materials
CAESAR II requires the specification of the pipe materials elastic modulus, Poissons ratio,
density, and (in most cases) expansion coefficient. The software provides a database containing
the parameters for many common piping materials. This information is retrieved by picking a
material from the list, by typing the material number, or by typing the entire material name and
then picking it from the match list.
The coefficient of expansion does not appear on the dialog box, but you can review it during
error checking.
These material properties carry forward from one element to the next during the design session
so you only need to type values for those elements in which a change occurs.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Materials dialog box.
Material
Displays the material name. Materials are specified either by name or number. All available
material names and their CAESAR II material numbers are displayed in the list. Because
this list is quite long, typing a partial material name (such as A106) allows you to select from
matching materials.
Numbers 1-17 corresponds to the generic materials without code allowable
stresses.
Material 18 represents the cold spring element for cut short.
Material 19 represents the cold spring element for cut long.

Material 20 is used to define Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe.

Material 21 is for user-defined material.
When you select a material from the database, the physical properties as well as the
allowable stresses are obtained and placed in the dialog box.
If you change the temperature or piping code later, these allowable stress values are
automatically updated.
For user-defined material, type the corresponding properties.
Allowable Stress
Indicates that you are supplying allowable stress data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Allowable Stress check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab is used to select the piping code and to enter any data required
for the code check. Allowable stresses are automatically updated for material, temperature
and code if available in the Material Database.
The Allowable Stress Auxiliary changes according to the piping code. It incorporates
piping codes with their associated inputs. Press F1 to display the help screen to be sure that
you correctly interpret each new input data cell.

Allowable stress data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements
until you change it.
Click Fatigue Curves to specify material fatigue curve data. The Material Fatigue Curve
dialog box displays. Type stress versus cycle data with up to 8 points per curve.
Code
Specifies the piping code. CAESAR II uses B31.3 by default. You can change this default
setting in the configuration. The following table lists the piping codes. You can find their
current publication dates in the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.
B31.1 Swedish Power Piping Code (Method 1)
B31.3 Swedish Power Piping Code (Method 2)
B31.4 B31.1 - 1967
B31.4, Chapter IX Stoomwezen
B31.5 RCC-M C
B31.8 RCC-M D
B31.8, Chapter VIII CODETI
B31.9 B31.11
Norwegian TBK-6 GPTC/Z380
ASME Sect III NC (Class 2) FDBR
ASME Sect III ND (Class 3) BS 7159
Navy 505 UKOOA
CAN/CSA Z662 IGE/TD/12
CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter

DNV
11
BS 806 ISO 14692
EN-13480 PD 8010-1
HPGSL PD 8010-2
JPI
The following topics discuss each of the input data cells. For more information about code
compliance considerations, see Technical Discussions (on page 879).

SC
Specifies the cold stress value. Typically, this is the cold allowable stress for the specific
material taken directly from the governing piping code. CAESAR II fills this box automatically
after you select the material and piping code. The value of SC is usually divided by the
longitudinal weld efficiency (Eff) before being used. See the notes that follow for the specific
piping code.
B31.1 - Allowable stress tables in Appendix A include the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies
where applicable. Do not use these efficiencies for flexibility stress calculations. If the joint
efficiency (Eff) is given on this dialog box, then CAESAR II divides the SC by the joint
efficiency before using it in the allowable stress equations.
B31.3 - Values from tables in Appendix A do not include the joint efficiency. The Eff value
should be zero, blank, or one. The 1980 version of B31.3 included the longitudinal weld joint
efficiencies as part of the tables in Appendix A. If you are using this version of the code,
then you should type a value for Eff in the appropriate box on this dialog box.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX - Not used. The only stress value in B31.4 is the yield stress taken
from Table 1 in the appendix. For more information, see Sy (on page 209).
B31.5 - Values from tables in Appendix A do not include the joint efficiency. The value of Eff
should be zero, blank, or one.
B31.8 - Su, the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength.
B31.8 Chapter VIII - Not used. The only stress value in B31.8 is the yield stress taken from
Appendix D. For more information, see Sy (on page 209).
B31.9 - SC is taken directly from I-1. If you define a value for Eff, the software only uses it in
the minimum wall thickness check.
B31.11 - Not used. The only stress value used in B31.11 is the yield stress.
ASME NC and ND - SC is taken directly from Appendix I. If you define a value for Eff, the
software ignores it.
Navy 505 - There is no mention of joint efficiency in the 505 specification; however, it is
implied in Footnote 1 of Table TIIA. If a joint efficiency is given, then CAESAR II divides SC
by the joint efficiency before using it in the allowable stress equations. Eff should be zero,
blank, or one.
CAN Z662 - Not used. The only stress value in Z184 is the yield stress specified in the
standards or specification under which the pipe was purchased. For more information, see
Sy (on page 209).
BS 806 - 0.2% of the proof stress at room temperature from Appendix E. Eff is not used in
BS 806. If you define a value for Eff, the software ignores it.
Swedish Method 1 - Not used. Method 1 only uses the yield or creep rupture stress at
temperature (SHn and Fn respectively on this dialog box). Eff is used, but is the
circumferential weld joint efficiency and has a different meaning.
Swedish Method 2 - SC is the allowable stress at room temperature from Appendix 2. Eff is
not used. If you define a value for Eff, the software ignores it.
B31.1 (1967) - SC is the allowable stress at room temperature from the tables in Appendix
A. These tables include the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies where applicable. Do not use
these efficiencies for flexibility stress calculations. If you define a value for Eff, then

CAESAR II divides the SC by the joint efficiency before using it in the allowable stress
equations.
Stoomwezen (1989) - SC is the yield stress at room temperature. This value is referred to
as Re in the code.
RCC-M C, D - SC is taken from the Appendix. Eff is not used. If you define a value for Eff,
the software ignores it.
CODETI - This is famb from the code. Eff is not used. If you define a value for Eff, the
software ignores it.
Norwegian - This is f1 from the code. Eff is not used for longitudinal joint efficiency.
BS 7159 - Not used. Design stress is typed in the SH boxes.
UKOO - Not used. Design stress (in the hoop direction) is typed in the SH boxes.
IGE/TD/1 - Not used.
DN - Not used.
EN-13480 - SC is the basic allowable stress at minimum metal temperature as defined in
Section 12.1.3.
GPTC/Z380 - Not used.
PD 8010-1 - Not used.
PD 8010-2 - Not used.
ISO 14692 - SC is used in a different way. See reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Not used.
JPI - Not used.
SH1, SH2, ... SH9

Specifies the hot stresses. Typically, these are the hot allowable stress for the specific
material taken directly from the governing piping code. CAESAR II fills the boxes
automatically after you select the material and piping code. There are nine boxes
corresponding to the nine operating temperatures. You must type a value for each defined
temperature case. The value of SH is usually divided by the longitudinal weld efficiency (Eff)
before being used. See the recommendations that follow for the specific piping code.
B31.1 - Allowable stress from Appendix A. For more information, see SC (on page 202).
B31.4 - B31.4 Chapter IX. SH is not used.
B31.8 - Temperature derating factor, T, according to Table 841.116A.
B31.8, Chapter VIII - Temperature derating factor, T (according to Table 841.116A).
B31.9 - Allowable stress from Table I-1. For more information, see SC (on page 202).
B31.11 - Not used.
ASME NC and ND - Allowable stress from Appendix I.
Navy 505 - Allowable stress from Table XIIA. For more information, see SC (on page 202).

CAN Z662 - Not used.

BS 806 - 0.2% of the proof stress at design temperature Appendix E. Eff is not used.
Swedish Method 1 - Yield stress at temperature from Appendix 1.
Swedish Method 2 - Allowable stress at temperature from Appendix 2.
B31.1 (1967) - Allowable stress from Appendix A. For more information, see SC (on page
202).
Stoomwezen - Yield stress at design temperature. This value is referred to as Re (vm) in
the code.
RCC-M C, D - Taken from the Appendix.
CODETI - f from the code.
Norwegian - f2 from the code.
FDBR - Hot allowable defined in Section 3.2.
BS 7159 - Design stress sd in the longitudinal direction as defined in Section 4.3 of the
code. That is d =d * Elamx . Specify design stress in the circumferential (hoop) direction by
typing the ratio of the circumferential design stress to the axial design stress in the Eff box.
Because design strain should be the same for both directions, the value in the Eff box is
also the ratio of Elam f(hoop) to Elam x (longitudinal).
UKOOA - Allowable design stress in the hoop direction defined in the code as f1 * LTHS.
The three hot allowable stress boxes correspond to the three possible temperature cases.
DNV - Yield stress is used here instead of hot allowable stress.
IGE/TD/12 - Yield stress is used here instead of a hot allowable stress.
EN-13480 - Allowable stress at maximum metal temperature.
GPTC/Z380 - Temperature reduction factor T according to Par. 192.115.
PD-8010 (Part 1 & Part 2) - Not used.
ISO 14692 - SH is used in a different way. See the reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Not used.
JPI - Not used.
SY1, SY2, ... SY9

Specifies the yield point or 0.2% endurance strength at the design temperature. This option
only displays when you select JPL or HPGSL in the Codes list.
This is Syt, the specified minimum yield or stated proof stress of the pipe material at
maximum temperature.
If you do not type a value, the software takes the value from the Material Database if
that value is available and applicable.

UTS1, UTS2, ... UTS9

Specifies the ultimate tensile strength at the design temperature.
F1, F2, ... F9

Specifies the stress range reduction factor for most piping codes.
B31.1 - Stress range reduction factor is obtained from equation 1c. Consult the applicable
piping code for methods of combining cycle life data where several thermal states exist and
where the number of thermal cycles is high. The software assumes a value of one if you do
not type a value.
B31.3 - Stress range reduction factor is obtained from equation 1c corresponding to Fig
302.3.5. If certain criteria are met, then the stress range reduction factor is allowed to
exceed 1.0. The number of cycles can be specified in this box for B31.3. This allows
CAESAR II to compute the cyclic reduction factor according to equation 1c.
B31.4 - Not used.
B31.8 - Stress range reduction factor is obtained from the equation given in Section
833.8(b). The number of cycles can be specified in this box for B31.8 which allows CAESAR
II to compute the cyclic reduction factor according to this equation.
B31.8 CHAPTER VIII - Not used.
B31.9 - References B31.1 for detailed stress analysis. For more information, see Paragraph
919.4.1.b.
CODETI - Called U in the code.
NORWEGIAN - Called fr in the code. This value can be as high as 2.34.
DNV - Material ultimate tensile strength at temperature.
CAN Z662 -
F1 = L - the location factor is obtained from Table 4.2
Application CLASS 1 CLASS 2 CLASS 3 CLASS 4
Gas (non-sour)
General & Cased crossings 1.000 0.900 0.700 0.550
Roads 0.750 0.625 0.625 0.500
Railways 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.500
Stations 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.500
Other 0.750 0.750 0.625 0.500
Gas (sour service)

Roads 0.750 0.625 0.625 0.500
Railways 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.500
Stations 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.500
Other 0.750 0.750 0.625 0.500
HVP
Roads 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800
Railways 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625
Stations 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800
Other 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800
LVP
Uncased railway crossings 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625
All others 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
Class 1 - Location areas containing ten or fewer dwelling units intended for human
occupancy
Class 2 - Location areas containing 11 to 46 dwelling units intended for human occupancy
OR
buildings with more than 20 persons
outside areas with more than 20 persons
industrial installations
Class 3 - Location areas with more than 46 dwelling units intended for human occupancy
OR institutions where rapid evacuation may be difficult
Class 4 - Location areas where buildings intended for human occupancy have 4 or more
stories.

F2 = T - The temperature derating factor, is obtained from Table 4.4
Temperature Derating Factor T
up to 120 (C) 1.00
150 0.97
180 0.93
200 0.91
230 0.87
F3 - F9 - Not used.
CAN Z662 Chapter 11 -
F1 - Not used.
F2 = T - Temperature derating factor obtained from Table 4.4
F3 = - Design factor for Condition A from Table 11.1.
F4 = - Design factor for Condition B from Table 11.1.
F5 - F9 - Not used.
BS 806 - Mean stress to failure in design life at design temperature. F1, F2, ... F9. This
value corresponds to the nine possible thermal states.
FDBR - Identical to B31.1,unless you type the expansion coefficients directly instead of
temperatures. In that case, the software cannot determine Ehot. In this case, type a value of
1.0 in the FAC box and use these boxes to specify the product of f * Ehot / Ecold for each
temperature case.
SWEDISH METHOD 1 - Creep rupture stress at temperature. F1, F2 ... F9. This value
corresponds to the nine possible thermal states.
STOOMWEZEN - Creep related material properties as follows:
F1 = Rrg - Average creep stress to produce 1% permanent set after 100,000 hours
at temperature (vm).
F2 = Rmg - Average creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).
F3 = Rmmin - Minimum creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours
at temperature (vm).
BS 7159 - Fatigue factor Kn. This value is used inversely compared to other codes so that
its value is greater than 1.0. Kn is calculated as follows:
Kn = 1 + 0.25(As/sn) (log10(n) - 3)
Where:
As = stress range during fatigue cycle
n = Maximum stress during fatigue cycle
n = number of stress cycles during design life

UKOOA - Ratio r from the material UKOOA idealized allowable stress envelope. This ratio
is defined as sa(0:1)/sa(2:1) as shown on the figure below. One value should be given for
each of the operating temperature cases.
IGE/TD/12 - UTS value.
EN-13480 - Stress range reduction factor taken from Table 12.1.3-1 (which matches the
B31.1 table above), or computed from equation 12.1.3-4. You can specify the number of
cycles in this box for EN-13480. This allows CAESAR II to compute the cyclic reduction
factor according to equation 12.1.3-4.
GPTC/Z380 - Not used.
PD-8010 (Part 1 & Part 2) - Not used.
ISO 14692 F is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Stress range reduction factor at design temperature.
JPI - Stress range reduction factor at design temperature.
Eff
Specifies the longitudinal weld joint efficiency. The field changes according to the current
piping code.
B31.1, B31.1-1967, B31.5 - Allowable stress tables include longitudinal weld joint
efficiencies where applicable. If Eff is specified, then values for SC and SH are divided by
Eff before they are used in the flexibility calculations. Eff is ignored in the minimum wall
calculation.
B31.3, B31.4, B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII, B31.9, B31.11, NAVY 505, Z662 (J), BS 806 (e),
CODETI (z), FDBR (vl), GPTC/Z380 - Allowable stress or yield stress tables do not include
longitudinal weld joint efficiencies. Eff is ignored for the flexibility calculations. SH is
multiplied by Eff when calculating the minimum wall thickness.
B31.4 Chapter IX, ASME NC, ASME ND, RCCM-C, RCCM-D - Ignored for both flexibility
and minimum wall thickness calculations. The box is disabled for these codes.
Swedish Method 1, Swedish Method 2, Norwegian TBK 5-6 - Circumferential joint factor
z and is used in the calculation of the code stresses rather than in the calculation of the
allowables. This applies to both flexibility or minimum wall thickness.
Stoomwezen - Cyclic reduction factor referred to as Cf in the code. CAESAR II does not
consider weld joint efficiency for this code.
BS 7159 - Ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity Eh/Ea. The software
uses a default value of 1.0, as though the material is isotropic if you leave this box blank.
UKOOA - Replace this box with f2. This is the system design factor. The value is typically
0.67.
IGE/TD/12 - Replace this box with Dfac. This is the system design factor (f) as described in
Table 2 of the IFE/TD/12 code. The value must be 0.3, 0.5, and 0.67.
DNV - Replaces this box with usage factor Ns (pressure yielding) from Tables C1 or C2.
The value must be between 0.77 and 0.96.
EN-13480 - Ignored for the flexibility calculations. SH is multiplied by Eff when calculating
the minimum wall thickness.

PD-8010 Part 1 - Weld joint factor used in determining the allowable hoop stress. See
Section 6.4.3.1 for details.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Not used.
ISO 14692 Eff is used in different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Longitudinal weld joint efficiency.
JPI - Longitudinal weld joint efficiency.
Sy
Specifies the yield stress. CAESAR II fills the box automatically after you select the material
and piping code. The field changes according to the current piping code, and is generally
used for the transmission and non-US piping codes.
B31.1 - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX - Used for the allowable stress determination.
B31.5 - Used to satisfy the requirements of Paragraph 523.2.2.f.4. This paragraph
addresses ferrous materials in piping systems between -20F and -150F. The value typed
here should be the quantity (40% of the allowable) as detailed in the Code. When Sy is
defined, the OPE case is considered a stress case. This value is the allowable reported in
the output report. The computed operating stress includes all longitudinal components and
ignore torsion.
B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII - Specified minimum yield stress.
B31.11 - Specified minimum yield stress.
ASME Sect III Class 2 and 3 - Basic Material Yield Strength at design temperature for use
in Eqn. 9 for consideration of Level A and B service limits. Level C and Level D service limits
must be satisfied in separate runs by adjusting the value for the occasional factor in the
CAESAR II configuration file. If the occasional factor is set to 1.2, the allowable stress is the
minimum of 1.2 x 1.5 SH or 1.5 SY. If the factor is 1.5, the allowable is the minimum of 1.5 x
1.5 SH or 1.8 SY. If the factor is 2.0, the allowable is the minimum of 2.0 x 1.5 S H or 2.0 SY.
To satisfy the code, replace S H with SM for the latter two.
Navy 505 - Not used.
CAN Z662 - Minimum yield strength taken from the standards or specifications under which
the pipe was purchased or according to clause 4.3.3.
BS 806 - Sustained stress limit. The lower of 0.8 X 0.2% Proof stress value or the creep
rupture design stress value defined in Appendix A under cold, or any other, operating
condition. See 17.2(c)
Swedish Method 1 - Not used. Type the yield stress at temperature in the respective SHn
boxes for the up to nine possible thermal states.
Swedish Method 2 - Ultimate tensile strength at room temperature.
B31.1 (1967) - Not used.
Stoomwezen (1989) - Tensile strength at room temperature. This value is referred to as Rm
in the code.

RCC-M C, D - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.

CODETI - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
Norwegian - Allowable stress at 7000 load cycles, RS, from Code Table 10.2. If you do not
type a value, then this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
FDBR - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
BS 7159 - Not used.
UKOOA - Not used.
IGE/TD/12 - Minimum yield stress (SMYS).
DnV - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
EN-13480 - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
GPTC/Z380 - Minimum yield stress.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Minimum yield stress.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Minimum yield stress.
ISO-14692 - Sy is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Not used.
JPI - Not used.
SYa
Specifies the specified minimum yield or stated proof stress of the pipe material at room
temperature. This is also referred to as SMYS or SY.
SY (c)
Specifies the minimum yield point or 0.2% endurance strength at room temperature.
Ksd
Material shakedown factor described in Table 4 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Typical values are:
Carbon Steel: 1.8
Austenitic Steel: 2.0
UTSa
Specifies the ultimate tensile strength of the pipe material corresponding to the specified
ambient temperature.

UTS (c)
Specifies the minimum tensile strength at room temperature.
DFac
Specifies the system design factor (f) as described in Table 2 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Its
value must be 0.3, 0.5, and 0.67.
Fac
Specifies the multiplication factor. The field changes according to the current piping code,
and is generally used for the transmission and non-US piping codes.
B31.1 - Not used.
B31.3 - Not used.
B31.4 - Indicates whether the pipe is restrained, such as long or buried, or unrestrained.
The equation for pipe under complete axial restraint is:
Stress = (Fac) x abs[ E(T2-T1) + (1-) Shoop ] + (SE + SL)(1-Fac)
Where:
E = elastic modulus
= thermal expansion coefficient per degree
T2 = operating temperature
T1 = ambient temperature
= Poisson's ratio
Shoop = hoop stress in the pipe.
SE = expansion stress due to bending
SL = sustained stress due to pressure.
Fac should be 1.0, 0.0, or 0.001. This value should be one for pipe under complete axial
restraint. This value should be one when the pipe is fully restrained, such as buried for a
long distance. The default value for Fac is 0.0. When Fac is 0.001, this indicates to
CAESAR II that the pipe is buried but that the soil supports have been modeled. This
causes the hoop stress component, rather than the longitudinal stress, to be added to the
operating stresses if the axial stress is compressive.
B31.4 Chapter IX - F1, hoop stress design factor, according to Table A402.3.5(a) of B31.4.
Appropriate values are 0.72 for pipelines or 0.60 for platform piping and risers.
B31.5 - Not used.
B31.8 - Construction design factor from Table 841.114B.
Construction Type: (Descriptions are approx.) Factor
A (CLASS 1) Wasteland, Deserts, Mountains, Grazing Land, Farmland,

0.72
Sparsely Populated Areas.
B (CLASS 2) Fringe Areas Around Cities, Industrial Areas, Ranch, or 0.60

Country Estates.
C (CLASS 3) Suburban Housing Developments, Shopping Centers,

0.50
Residential Areas.
D (CLASS 4) Multi-Story Buildings are prevalent, traffic is heavy, and 0.40 (0.4 defaults if
where there may be numerous other utilities underground. left blank)
B31.8 Chapter VIII - F1, Hoop stress design factor, according to Table A842.22 of B31.8.
Appropriate values are 0.72 for pipelines or 0.50 for platform piping and risers.
B31.9 - Not used.
B31.11 - Indicates whether the pipe is restrained, such as long or buried, or unrestrained.
Where:
E = elastic modulus
= Poisson's ratio
ASME Sect III, Class 2 and 3 - Not used.
B31.1 (1967) - Not used.
Navy 505 - Not used
CAN Z662 - Indicates whether the pipe is restrained, such as long or buried, or
unrestrained.
Where:
E = elastic modulus
= Poisson's ratio

BS806 - Not used.
Swedish Power Code, Method 1 - Sigma(tn) multiplier. This value is usually 1.5. This value
should be 1.35 for prestressed (cold sprung) piping. The default value is 1.5.
Swedish Power Code, Method 2 - Not used.
Stoomwezen - Constant whose value is either 0.44 or 0.5. For more information, see
Stoomwezen Section 5.2.
RCC-M C, D - Not used.
CODETI - Not used.
Norwegian - Material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature, RM. If this value is not
specified, this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
FDBR - Overrides the ratio of Ehot/Ecold which is automatically determined by CAESAR II.
The modulus ratio is used to compute the expansion case allowable stress based on the
material and temperature. Normally, you can leave this box blank. However, if necessary,
you can type a value greater than zero and less than one to override the ratio calculated by
the software.
To use FBDR, type the hot modulus in the Elastic Modulus box of the dialog box. CAESAR
II looks up the cold modulus and computes this necessary ratio. Using the hot modulus in
the flexibility analysis is a deviation of FBDR from every other piping code in CAESAR II.
If you type expansion coefficients directly instead of temperatures, then the software cannot
determine Ecold. In this case, type a value of 1.0 in this cell and use the cyclic reduction
factor boxes to specify the product of (f * E hot /Ecold) for each temperature case.
BS 7159 - Mean temperature change multiplier k as defined in Section 7.2.1 of the code.
This should be 0.85 for liquids, 0.8 for gases, and 1.0 for ambient temperature changes. If
left blank, this value defaults to 1.0.
UKOOA - Mean temperature change multiplier k as defined for the BS 7159. If left blank,
this value defaults to 1.0.
IGE/TD/12 - Material shakedown factor Ksd described in Table 4 of the IGE/TD/12 code.
Typical values are 1.8 for carbon steel and 2.0 for austenitic steel..
HPGSL - Not used.
JPI - Not used.
DNV - Usage factor Nu (pressure bursting) from Tables C1or C2. Values must be between
0.64 and 0.84.
EN-13480 - Not used.
GPTC/Z380 - Construction design factor from Table 192.111.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Same usage as B31.4.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Not used.
ISO 14692 - Fac is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.

Pvar
Specifies the pressure variance. The field changes according to the current piping code.
ASME and RCC-M C, D - Variance in the pressure between operating and peak to be used
as the component in equation 9 above that found from B1 * P * Do / 2tn. Do not type the
peak pressure for Pvar. Type the difference between the operating pressure and the peak
pressure.
Swedish Power Code, Methods 1 & 2 - Beta for the Seff calculation. If not given, this
value defaults to 10%. Type ten percent as 10.0. Values must be between 0.1 and 25.0.
Values specified outside of this range are automatically adjusted to the outer limit of the
allowed range. The definition for beta, as given in the Swedish piping code in section
5.6.2.1, is the "maximum allowable minus the tolerance as a percentage of the nominal wall
thickness".
Stoomwezen - Cm coefficient in the code whose value is usually 1.0.
Norwegian - Difference between design pressure P (in equation 10.7) and peak pressure
Pmaks (in equation 10.8).
The table that follows defines when each of these parameters is valid input for the piping
code (V) or not required (N).
DNV - Usage factor N for equivalent stress check from Table C4. Values must be between
0.77 and 1.00.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Design factor as discussed in Section 6.4.1.2. Typical limits on this value
are 0.3 and 0.72, depending on categories and class locations. This design factor
determines the allowable hoop stress. This value has no units for PD-8010 Part 1.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Design factor as discussed in Section 6.4.1 Table 2. Type the value of fd
for the hoop stress evaluation. This value should be either 0.6 (riser/land fall) or 0.72
(seabed/tie-in). CAESAR II determines the appropriate fd values for the equivalent stress
from Table 2. This value has no units for PD-8010 Part 2.
This value is taken from the Material Database, if available and applicable, unless
you type a value.
ISO 14692 - Pvar is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
"f" Allowed Maximum of 1.2

Indicates whether to allow a maximum cyclic reduction factor. The 2004 edition of B31.3
permits the cyclic reduction factor (f) to exceed 1.0 under certain conditions. To allow "f" to
exceed 1.0, up to the limit of 1.2, click On. To prohibit "f" from exceeding 1.0, click Off.
This setting is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you
change it.

Appendix P - OPE Allowable Reduction

Indicates whether the software reduces the Operating Range Allowable value by 15%.
Appendix P in the 2010 Edition of B31.3 requires a reduction of the Operating Range
Allowable value by 15% for materials with ratio of Sy/St > 0.8. The software selects this
check box by default for the B31.3 code. When selected, CAESAR II performs this
reduction, when applicable.
You must set the Implement Appendix P configuration setting to True for CAESAR
II to display this check box on the Allowable Stresses tab of the Classic Piping Input
dialog box. You can find this configuration setting in the SIFs and Stresses > B31.3
Code-Specific Settings section of the Configuration Editor.
Restrained Piping per B31.8

Indicates whether or not the piping is restrained. With restrained piping, the soil or supports
prevent the pipe from axial displacement or flexure at bends. With unrestrained piping, the
piping is free to displace axially or to flex at bends.
B31.8 (2003) distinguishes between restrained and unrestrained piping for the purposes of
stress computations. When implementing the B31.8 piping code, you must define which
sections of the piping system are restrained according to Code Section 833.1.
If the pipe is restrained, click Yes. If the pipe is not restrained, click No.
See Section 833.1 in the B31.8 code standards for more information.
Fatigue Curves
Displays the Material Fatigue Curves dialog box.

Cycle Stress Table

Specifies cycle and stress values. Use the material fatigue curve data to evaluate fatigue
load cases and cumulative use scenarios. You can type up to eight cycle-stress pairs.
These values must be entered in ascending cycle order.
IGE/TD/12 provides the opportunity to type up to five fatigue curves, representing fatigue
classes D, E, F, G, and W. Fatigue evaluations are explicitly specified by IGE/TD/12.
CAESAR II offers them as extensions to other codes.
You must type cycle/stress pairs in ascending order (ascending by cycles). Type stress
values as the allowable stress range rather than allowable stress amplitude. The software
considers fatigue curves to be specified using a logarithmic interpolation.
Static fatigue cases are evaluated against the full range of the fatigue curve, while
dynamic fatigue cases are assumed to represent amplitudes, and are therefore evaluated
against half of the range of the fatigue curve.
Read from File

Displays the Open dialog box so that you can select a file (some files are shipped with
CAESAR II) and read cycles and stress data into the Cycles and Stress boxes.
Composition/Type
Specifies the material composition of the pipe.
Aluminum - Aluminum alloy or alloy steel containing 9% nickel. For use at
temperatures lower than room temperature.
Austenite - Austenite stainless steel and high nickel contained allows. For use at
temperatures higher than room temperature.
Others - Any material other than aluminum or austenite.
TD/12 Modulus Correction

IGE/TD/12 Section A5.6 requires that the allowable fatigue stress (as specified in the fatigue
curves) be adjusted by the ratio of the material modulus-of-elasticity divided by 209103
N/mm2. This divisor can be adjusted if necessary by changing the entry in the Modulus
Correction box.
Allowable Stress (ISO 14692)

Activates allowable stress data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the Allowable
Stress check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. When you select material 20 for
FRP (Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic) and piping code ISO 14692, the Allowable Stress
auxiliary dialog box changes.

al(0:1)
Specifies the long term axial stress at 0:1 stress ratio. Typically, the axial stress (hoop stress
is 0 at this point) is lower than the axial stress al(2:1) (hoop stress is double the axial stress
at this point). The ratio of these stresses, called bi-axial stress ratio, can range between 0.5
and 0.75 for plain pipe depending on the winding angle and specific pipe type.
al(1:1)
Specifies the long term axial stress at 1:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14962,, hoop stress
has the same value as that for axial stresses at a 1:1 stress ratio, that is hl(1:1)=al(1:1).
However, CAESAR II allows you to type different values for al(1:1) and hl(1:1) for a
generalized failure profile. In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error
Checker.
If you leave both the al(1:1) and hl(1:1) boxes blank, CAESAR II assumes that a simplified
envelope is used for plain pipe.
hl(1:1)
Specifies the long term hoop stress at 1:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14692, hoop stress
has the same value as that for axial stresses at a 1:1 stress ratio. That is, hl(1:1) = al(1:1).
However, CAESAR II allows a different value for al(1:1) and hl(1:1) for a generalized failure
profile. In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning message displays in the Error Checker.
If you specify al(1:1) and leave hl(1:1) blank, CAESAR II assumes that hl(1:1) is equal to
al(1:1), and displays a warning message in the Error Checker. For more information, see
al(1:1) (on page 217).

al(2:1)
Specifies the long term axial stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14962, hoop
stress is twice the axial stress at a 2:1 ratio, that is hl(2:1) = 2 * al(2:1). This is a natural
condition when a pressurized pipe is enclosed at both ends. However CAESAR II allows you
to type different values for hl(2:1) 2 * al(2:1). In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning
message in the Error Checker.
hl(2:1)
Specifies the long term hoop stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14692, hoop stress is
twice the axial stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. That is, hl(2:1)= 2*al(2:1). However, CAESAR II allows
hl(2:1) to have a different value than twice of al(2:1). In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning
message in the Error Checker.
If you specify al(2:1) and leave hl(2:1) blank, CAESAR II assumes that hl(2:1) is equal to twice
al(2:1), and displays a warning message in the error checker. For more information, see al(2:1)
(on page 218).
Qs
Specifies the qualified stress for joints, bends, and tees. A qualified stress, Qs, provided by
the manufacturer is defined as:
Pq is the qualified pressure;

D is the average diameter of the pipe;
tr is the average reinforced wall thickness of the pipe.
The qualified stress, qs, for fittings is calculated as:
CAESAR II does not require qualified stress Qs for plain pipe. Qs for pipe = hl(2:1),
and hl(2:1) is required input for plain pipe.
You must enter qualified stress Qs for joints, bends and tees even if these fitting are
not in the piping model. You can type positive values (1000.0 for Qs and 1.0 for r,
for example) to pass the Error Checker.

r
Specifies the bi-axial stress ratio for bends, tees, and joints. The bi-axial stress r is defined
as:
where:
sh(2:1) is the short-term hoop strength, under 2:1 stress conditions;
sa(0:1) is the short-term axial strength, under axial loading only.
In the absence of data from the manufacturer, use the default values:
Short-term
Fitting Component Strength Bi-axial
Stress Ratio (r)*
Filament-wound unidirectional 90
and
0.45
Bends 1.0
Filament-wound and hand-lay 1
1.9
100% hand-lay
Tees Filament-wound and hand-lay 1 1.0
Other Hand
laminated
CSM/WR 1, 9 1.9
Spigot/Socket Adhesive or
1.0
Mechanical Connection
0.45
Joints Threaded
1.0
Flange
2.0
Laminated
You can use a higher factor for r if justified by testing according to 6.2.6
ISO 14692-2-2002.
CAESAR II assumes that the bi-axial stress ratio r is 1.0 for tees according to ISO 14692.
CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error Checker if the bi-axial stress ratio r is
greater than 20 for bends or joints. You can ignore the warning message.
If a piping system has no joints or bends, the corresponding bi-axial stress ratio r should not
be required. However, you must type a positive value (such as 1.0) for r to get rid of error
messages.

Eh/Ea
Specifies the ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity. If you leave this
box blank, CAESAR II uses a default value of 2.0.
Hand Lay
Indicates that the bend is hand-layed. If this box is selected, the software assumes smooth
bends. This affects the calculations of both the flexibility factor and the SIFs for the bend.
1, 2, ... 9 for Partial Factor for Temperature (A1)

Specifies the partial factor for temperature. Because each operating temperature needs an
A1 factor, you may need to specify up to 9 factors if all 9 operating temperatures are defined
in a model. If you leave the boxes blank, CAESAR II uses the default value of 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.2 Design Temperature.
The effect of temperature on reduction of mechanical properties shall be accounted for by
the partial factor A1, which is determined according to Annex D in ISO 14692-2:2002.
The maximum operating temperature of the piping system shall not exceed the temperature
used to calculate the partial factor A1 of the GRP components. If the operating temperature
is less than or equal to 65C, then A 1 is generally equal to 1.0
The effect of low temperatures on material properties and system performance shall be
considered. For service temperatures below 0C, the principal should consider the need for
additional testing, depending on the resin system. Both qualification as well as additional
mechanical tests should be considered.
Glass Reinforced Plastic GRP materials do not undergo ductile/brittle transition within
the temperature range of this part of ISO 14692. Because of this, there is no significant
abrupt change in mechanical properties at low temperatures. A concern is that at
temperatures lower than 35C, internal residual stresses could become large enough to
reduce the safe operating envelope of the piping system.
Chemical Resistance (A2)

Specifies the partial factor for chemical resistance. If you leave the box blank, CAESAR II
uses the default value of 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO 14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.3 Chemical Degradation.
The effect of chemical degradation of all system components from either the transported
medium or the external environment shall be considered on both the pressure and
temperature ratings. System components shall include adhesive and elastomeric
seals/locking rings, if used, as well as the basic glass fiber and resin materials.

The effect of chemical degradation shall be accounted for by the partial factor A 2 for
chemical resistance, which is determined according to Annex D in ISO 14692-2:2002. If the
normal service fluid is water, then A 2 = 1. Reference shall be made to manufacturers' data if
available.
In general, the aqueous fluids specified in the qualification procedures of ISO

14692-2:2002 are among the more aggressive environments likely to be
encountered. However, strong acids, alkalis, hypochlorite, glycol, aromatics and
alcohol can also reduce the properties of Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP) piping
components; the effect depends on the chemical concentration, temperature and
resin type.
The information from the manufacturers' tables is based on experience and
laboratory tests at atmospheric pressure, on published literature, raw material
suppliers' data, and so on. Chemical concentrations, wall stresses, reinforcement
type and resin have not always been taken into account. Therefore the tables only
give an indication of the suitability of the piping components to transport the listed
chemicals. In addition, the mixing of chemicals may cause severe situations.
Cyclic Service (A3)

Specifies the partial factor for cyclic service. If you leave the box blank, CAESAR II uses the
default value of 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO 14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.4 Fatigue and Cyclic
Loading.
Cyclic loading is not necessarily limited to pressure loads. Thermal and other cyclic loads
shall therefore be considered when assessing cyclic severity.
If the predicted number of pressure or other loading cycle is less than 7000 over the design
life, the service shall be considered static. If required, the limited cyclic capability of the pipe
system components can be demonstrated according to 6.4.5 of ISO 14692-2:2002.
If the predicted number of pressure or other loading cycles exceeds 7000 over the design
life, then the designer shall determine the design cyclic severity, R c, of the piping system. Rc
is defined as:
where Fmin and Fmax are the minimum and maximum loads (or stresses) of the load (or
stress) cycle.
The partial factor, A3 , for cyclic service is given by:
where N is the total number of cycles during service life.

This equation is intended for cyclic internal pressure loading only, but may be applied with
caution to axial loads provided they remain tensile, that is, it is not applicable for reversible
loading.

System Design Factor

Specifies the system design factor. This value is multiplied by the occasional load factor (k)
to generate the value of the part factor for loading (f2). If you leave this box blank, CAESAR
II uses the default value of 0.67.
The purpose of the system design factor is to define an acceptable margin of safety
between the strength of the material and the operating stresses for the three load cases.
These load cases are occasional, sustained including thermal loads, and sustained
excluding thermal loads. The following table shows the relationship between the system
design factor, the occasional load factor, and f2, along with their default values.
Load System Design Occasional Part Factor For

Loading Type
Duration Factor (SDF) Load Factor Loading (f2)
Occasional Short-term 0.67 1.33 0.89
Sustained Including
Long-term 0.67 1.24 0.83
Thermal Loads
Sustained
Excluding Thermal Long-term 0.67 1.00 0.67
Loads
The part factor for loading f2 is equal to System Design Factor times the Occ Load
Factor.
Thermal Factor (k)

Specifies the thermal factor. This factor is defined in Section 8.4 of ISO-14692-3:2002(E). In
the absence of further information, the thermal factor k should be taken as 0.85 for liquids
and 0.8 for gasses. If you leave this box blank, CAESAR II uses a default value of 1.0.
Material Elastic Properties

Specifies the elastic modulus and Poissons ratio of the material. These values must be typed
for Material type 21 (user specified).
Material properties in the database can be changed permanently using the CAESAR II
Material Database editor. For more information, see Material Database (on page 1018).

Double-click >> to display the Edit Elastic Properties dialog box.
Material Properties
Displays the properties associated with the material. CAESAR II automatically fills in the
Modulus of Elasticity, Poisson's Ratio, and other material properties. If you want to
change any material property extracted from the material database, change the value in the
corresponding box.
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP)

The CAESAR II FRP pipe element models an orthotropic material whose properties can be
defined by:
Ea - Axial Modulus-of-elasticity
Eh - Hoop Modulus-of-elasticity
h/a - Poisson's ratio of the strain in the axial direction resulting from a stress in the hoop
direction.

G - Shear Modulus (Not related to the Elastic Modulus and Poisson's ratio in the
conventional manner.)
FRP pipe is specified by setting the Material box to 20. The material name displays and
FRP properties from the configuration file display on the dialog box.
Some of the material parameters are renamed when the FRP material is selected: Elastic
Modulus changes to Elastic Modulus/axial and Poisson's Ratio changes to "E a/Eh*h/a". The
latter entry requires the value of the following expression: (E a*h/a) / Eh. This expression is
equal to a/h, Poisson's ratio of the strain in the hoop direction resulting from a stress in the
axial direction. The shear modulus G is defined by typing the ratio of G/E a (shear modulus to
axial modulus) on the special execution parameters screen. You can type only one ratio for
each job.
The decrease in flexural stiffness at bends and intersections due to changes in the circular
cross-section is typically negligible because the hoop modulus is usually considerably higher
than the axial modulus for FRP pipe. Because of this, a default flexibility factor of 1 is used
for these components. Similarly, because the fatigue tests performed by Markl on steel pipe
are likely to have no bearing on FRP design, an SIF of 2.3 is applied for all fittings. CAESAR
II uses these recommendations for all FRP fittings unless you specifically override the
defaults. You can override the defaults on a point-by-point basis or by forcing all calculations
to adhere to the requirements of the governing code through a CAESAR II configuration
parameter. Note that if the BS 7159, UKOOA, or ISO 14692 code is in effect, all SIFs and
flexibility factors are calculated according to that code regardless of the configuration
parameter settings.
Densities
The densities of the piping material, insulation, and fluid contents are specified in this block. The
piping material density is a required entry and is usually extracted from the Material Database.
You can also type Fluid density in terms of specific gravity, if convenient, by following the input

immediately with the letters: SG, for example, 0.85SG (there can be no spaces between the
number and the SG).
If an insulation thickness is specified (in the pipe section properties block) but no
insulation density is specified, CAESAR II defaults to the density of calcium silicate.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Densities dialog box.

Refract Thk
Specifies the thickness of refractory to apply to the piping. Refractory is applied to the inside
of the pipe. It is included in the dead weight of the system and reduces the internal pipe area
affecting the fluid weight in the system.
Refract Density
Displays the density of the refractory lining. If you select a value from the list, the numeric
value replaces the material name when the box is registered.
Refractory densities are much higher than insulation densities and could lead to
under sized restraints.
Densities for some typical refractory materials display below:
MATERIAL DENSITY (lb./cu.in. )
A.P. GREEN GREENCAST 94 0.09433
A.P. GREEN KRUZITE 0.08391

CASTABLE
A.P. GREEN MC-30 0.08391
A.P. GREEN MC-22 0.07234
A.P. GREEN KAST-SET 0.06655
A.P. GREEN KAST-O-LITE 25 0.05208
A.P. GREEN VSL-35AST 94 0.02257
B & W KAOCRETE B 0.05787
B & W KAOCRETE 32-C 0.08333
B & W KAO-TAB 95 0.09549
B & W KAOLITE 2200 0.03241
B & W KAOLITE 2200-HS 0.04745
B & W KAOLITE 2500-LI. 0.03472

Insul Thk
Specifies the thickness of the insulation to be applied to the piping. Insulation applied to the
outside of the pipe is included in the dead weight of the system and in the projected pipe
area used for wind load computations.
Even if you specify the unit weight of the insulation or cladding, the thickness values
are still required so that the software can determine the correct projected area.
Clad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the cladding to be applied to the piping. Cladding is applied to the
outside of the insulation. It is included in the dead weight of the system and in the projected
pipe area used for wind load computations.
Even if you specify the unit weight of cladding plus insulation, the thickness values
are still required so that the software can determine the correct projected area.
Insulation Density
Displays the density of the insulation on a per unit volume basis. If you select a value from
the list, the numeric value replaces the material name when the box is registered.
If you leave this box blank, then the software assumes that the insulation is CALCIUM
SILICATE having a density of 0.006655.
Verify that this assumed value is appropriate for the current application. Sample density
values for insulation materials are:
MATERIAL DENSITY
AMOSITE ASBESTOS .009259
CALCIUM SILICATE .006655
CAREYTEMP .005787
FIBERGLASS (OWEN/CORNING) .004051
FOAM-GLASS/CELLULAR .004630
GLASS
HIGH TEMP .01389
KAYLO 10 (TM) .007234
MINERAL WOOL .004919
PERLITE / CELO-TEMP 1500 .007523

POLY URETHANE .001273
STYRO FOAM .001042
SUPER X .01447
Cladding Density
Displays the thickness of the cladding to apply to the piping. Cladding is applied to the
outside of the insulation and is included in the dead weight of the system. Cladding is also
included in the projected pipe area used for wind load computations.
Insul/Cladding Unit Weight

Displays an alternative to specifying the insulation and cladding thickness and density. This
is an optional combined uniform load (weight per unit length).
If you are applying wind loads, then you must type the insulation and cladding
thickness to obtain the correct projected area for wind load computation.
Line Number
Specifies the line number for an element.
Line numbers carry forward to successive elements. Because of this, you only need to specify
data on the first element of a new line.
To assign a line number name, do one of the following:
Select the Line Number box, or press F9. Select <new..> to automatically assign a name.
The line number is named Line Number X, where X is a sequential number.
Use the auto-complete feature that populates with the nearest match as you type. For
example, if you have a line named 8-300-123 and you want to assign 8-150-124, Type 8
and the box automatically fills with the first line number that matches what you have typed.
Press End to change the last character.

You can also select elements on the graphics model and click Create from Selection in the
Line Numbers dialog box.
See Also
Line Numbers (on page 285)
Available Commands
Topics
File Menu .................................................................................... 229
Edit Menu.................................................................................... 237
Model Menu ................................................................................ 245
Environment Menu ...................................................................... 286
Global Menu................................................................................ 334
Options Menu.............................................................................. 340
View Menu .................................................................................. 345
Tools Menu ................................................................................. 363
File Menu
Performs actions associated with opening, closing, and running the job file.
New
Creates a new CAESAR II job.
New Job Name Specification Dialog Box

Controls parameters for creating a new CAESAR II job.
Enter the name for the new job file
Specifies the job name.
Piping Input
Indicates that the job is a piping job. The software only displays this radio button option
when you create a new file from the CAESAR II main menu.
Structural Input
Indicates that the job is a structural job. The software only displays this radio button option
Enter the data directory
Specifies the location of the job file. You can type the directory into the field, or click the
browse button to browse to the directory.

New Job Name Specification Dialog Box

Controls parameters for creating a new CAESAR II job.
Enter the name for the new job file
Specifies the job name.
Piping Input
Indicates that the job is a piping job. The software only displays this radio button option
Structural Input
Indicates that the job is a structural job. The software only displays this radio button option
Enter the data directory
Specifies the location of the job file. You can type the directory into the field, or click the
browse button to browse to the directory.
Open
Opens an existing CAESAR II job.
Open Dialog Box

Controls options for opening existing files.
Look in
Specifies the folder in which the file exists.
Name
Lists the files in the selected folder that match the selected file type. You can sort the list by
clicking the Name, Data modified, or Type column headers.
File Name
Specifies the name of the selected file. This field is automatically filled in if you click a file in
the Name list.
Files of type
Specifies the type of file listed in the Name list.
System
Changes the Look in box to the CAESAR II System folder.
Examples
Changes the Look in box to the CAESAR II Examples folder.

Open CADWorx Model

Opens an existing CADWorx model.
Save <filename>
Saves the current CAESAR II job under its current name.
Save As
Saves the current CAESAR II job under a new name.
Save As Dialog Box

Save in
Specifies the folder in which to save the job.
Name
File Name
the Name list.
Save as type
Save
Writes the file to the selected folder.
Save As Dialog Box

Save in
Specifies the folder in which to save the job.
Name
File Name
the Name list.
Save as type
Save
Writes the file to the selected folder.

Save as Graphics Image

Saves the current CAESAR II job as an HTML page, .TIFF, .BMP, or .JPG file.
Error Check
Sends the model through interactive error checking. This is the first step of analysis. When
the error check is complete, the Errors and Warnings dialog box displays the results. For more
information, see Error Checking (on page 522).
Archive
Assigns a password to the job to prevent inadvertent alteration of the model or to type the
password to unlock the file. Archived input files cannot be altered or saved without this
password; however, they can be opened and reviewed.
Archive Dialog Box

Controls options for archiving a CAESAR II job.
Password
Specifies the password for the job. Type a password between 6 and 24 characters in length.
Archive Dialog Box

Controls options for archiving a CAESAR II job.
Password
Specifies the password for the job. Type a password between 6 and 24 characters in length.
Batch Run
Error checks the model without any involvement required by you. This process stops only for
errors, which must be resolved for the analysis to run successfully. When you select Batch Run,
the software uses the existing or default static load cases and performs the static analysis.
Print Setup
Sets up the printer for the input listing.
Print Setup Dialog Box

Controls parameters for setting up a printer.
Name
Specifies the name of the printer.
Properties
Displays printer properties.

Size
Specifies the size of the paper in the printer.
Source
Specifies the active paper tray
Portrait
Prints the file using a vertical orientation.
Landscape
Prints the file using a horizontal orientation.
Network
Allows you to specify a printer from the network.
Print Setup Dialog Box

Controls parameters for setting up a printer.
Name
Specifies the name of the printer.
Properties
Displays printer properties.
Size
Specifies the size of the paper in the printer.
Source
Specifies the active paper tray
Portrait
Prints the file using a vertical orientation.
Landscape
Prints the file using a horizontal orientation.
Network
Allows you to specify a printer from the network.
Print Preview
Displays a preview of the print job.

Print <filename>
Prints the current job. The software prompts you to select the reports to print, prior to
printing.
You can change the report contents by modifying the .inp file.
Any time an input listing is written to a file or to the printer, the format of each of the reports is
obtained from the .inp file. The .inp files are ASCII text files which can be modified to create
reports of differing styles or content. You can modify the Initial.inp to change the page length in
the report, and the starting and stopping column positions. Any text editor (such as Notepad)
can be used to change any of the .inp files. If you change the .inp file, you may receive fatal
errors during report generation if impossible formats, or if invalid commands are requested.
If you prefer a different (more columnar) form of the basic element data, three additional
formatting files have been provided.
ELEMENT0.INP - Intergraph CAS standard element format
ELEMENT1.INP - 1st alternate element format
ELEMENT2.INP - 2nd alternate element format
ELEMENT3.INP - 3rd alternate element format
To use any of these formatting files, change folders to the CAESAR II\System folder. Then,
copy the formatting file that you want to use into Element.inp.
To print an Input Echo from the input dialog box, click File > Print. To write an Input Echo to the
screen for review, click File > Print Preview.
You can print an input listing from the output module as part of the entire output report.

Input Listing Options Dialog Box

Controls which options are included in the print job. Select the box for items to include. Clear the
box for items not to include.
Input Listing Options Dialog Box

Controls which options are included in the print job. Select the box for items to include. Clear the
box for items not to include.

Recent Piping Files

Displays a list of most recently opened piping files.
Recent Structural Files

Displays a list of most recently opened structural files.
Exit
Closes the session. The software prompts you to save any unsaved changes.

Edit Menu
Performs actions associated with cutting and pasting, navigating through the elements, and
performing a few small utilities.
Cut
Cuts selected elements from the document and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected
elements replace the previous contents of the Clipboard.
Copy
Copies selected elements to the Clipboard. When you use this command, it replaces the
previous contents of the Clipboard with the new contents.
Paste
Inserts the Clipboard contents into the file. The command is not available if the Clipboard is
empty.
Continue
Moves the dialog box to the next element in the model. The software adds a new element if
there is no next element.
Duplicate Element
Duplicates the last element in a model so that you can quickly continue building the model.
Select the last element, and then click Duplicate Element. For more information on duplicating
groups of elements in a model, see Duplicate (on page 334).
If you select an element that is not at the end of the model and click Duplicate Element,
the software continues to the next element in the model without duplicating the selected
element.
Insert Element
Inserts an element.
Insert Element Dialog Box

Controls options for inserting an element.
Before
Inserts a new element prior to the current element. The To node of the new element is then
equal to the From node of the current element.
After
Inserts a new element following the current element. The From node of the new element is

then equal to the To node of the current element.
Delete Element
Deletes the current element.
Find
Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box that allows you
to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You can enter the node
numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only the From node number, the
software searches for the first available element that starts with that node number. If you enter
only the To node number, the software searches for an element ending with that node number.
When the software locates the element it highlights the element and fits it in the view. You can
zoom out to better identify the location of the highlighted element within the model.
Find Element Dialog Box

Controls parameters for finding elements.
Node Numbers
Specifies the node numbers to search for. Enter a single node number to find the next
element containing that node number (either as a From or To node). Enter two node
numbers to find the next element containing both of those node numbers (in either order).
Zoom to Node if Found
Indicates that the software will display the found node in the active view.
Global
Specifies the absolute (global) coordinates for the start node of each discontiguous system
segment.
This may be required for three reasons:
1. To show nodal coordinates in absolute, rather than relative coordinates.
2. Defining global coordinates for discontiguous segments allows the piping segments to plot in
the correct locations, rather than superimposed at the origin.
3. It is important that the pipe be given the correct elevation if wind loading is present.
Global Coordinates Dialog Box

Controls parameters for defining the absolute coordinates for the start node of an element.
X
Specifies the X coordinate.
Y
Specifies the Y coordinate.

Z
Specifies the Z coordinate.
Close Loop
Closes a loop by filling in the delta coordinates between two nodes in the model.
Increment
Specifies the increment between nodes. CAESAR II uses the nodal increment set in
Configure/Setup when generating the From and To nodes for new elements. You can override
this behavior by typing a different value in this dialog box. For more information, see Auto Node
Number Increment (on page 69).
Set Node Increment Dialog Box

Specifies the parameters for setting an increment between nodes.
Node Increment
Specifies the increment between node numbers.
Distance
Finds the distance between two specified nodes or between any two points you select on
the model.
Press CTRL + click to select multiple distances along a line of pipe.
Distance Dialog Box

Allows measurements for finding distances between nodes or specified points on a model.
Choose a measuring method, and then view results for the measurements in the Distance
dialog, at the bottom of the dialog box, and on the model.
Use the Pan and Zoom functions to move around larger models when measuring the
distance between two nodes.
Press SHIFT to confine the measuring line to the x-, y-, or z-axis directions. When you press
SHIFT, the software selects the axis nearest to the cursor location. As the mouse moves
around the model, the software changes the measuring line direction to the closest axis to
the cursor location.
Press CTRL + click to select multiple distances along a line of pipe.

Measure Method
Snap to Nearest Node
Specifies for the software to choose the start and end point of an element on the model by
highlighting snap points. Snap points are markers that indicate element node points. The
software uses snap points to highlight a node when the mouse cursor comes within a certain
proximity range of it. The software defaults to having this check box selected. Clear this
check box for the software to measure without using the snapping functionality.
Clear the Snap to Nearest Node check box when measuring distance in imported
graphics models, such as from CADWorx or Smart 3D. The software cannot snap to
nodes on models created outside of CAESAR II.
Change the shape, size, and color of snap point markers by selecting Properties >
Display Options from the right-click context menu. Make changes to the Graphic
Edit Options>Symbol Information settings, and then click Apply in the Plot
Settings dialog box.
Origin and Selected Element
Calculates the distance between the origin point using the starting node coordinates (0,0,0),
and a selected point on the model.
To and From Nodes
Calculates the distance between two nodes. Type the node numbers in the boxes and click
Calculate (or press ENTER) for the software to perform the distance calculation. The
distance calculated displays in the Results area of the dialog box.
Calculate
Calculates the To and From Nodes measurement specified in the Measure Method.
Free Measure
Calculates the distance between two points anywhere on the model (regardless of the
node). Free measure lets you measure randomly on a model.
Results
Shows the results of the previous distance calculation.
The software also displays the result on the status bar at the bottom of the window. The
results indicate the start and end point and the length measured in the unit of measure
specified for the current model.
The software displays the difference of change along the three axes in the delta (DX, DY, DZ)
boxes.
What do you want to do?

Measure between two nodes
1. Open a CAESAR II file.
2. Click Piping Input in the main menu.
The Classic Piping Input dialog box opens.

3. Click Distance on the Input Tools toolbar.

The Distance dialog box opens.
4. Click Nodes to measure distance between two specified nodes.
5. Type the starting and ending node numbers and click Calculate.
The software displays the measured distance in the Delta X, Y, Z boxes at the bottom of the
Distance dialog box, on the measure line in the model, and in the status bar at the bottom
of the window.
After you select the method for measuring the distance, you can dock the Distance
dialog box to the side or even minimize the dialog box entirely. Then, as you measure
distances, the results display on the model and also in the status bar at the bottom of
the window.
Press ESC to stop the distance measuring functionality on the model (but leave the
dialog box open), or close the Distance dialog box.
Measure between two points on a model
1. Open a CAESAR II file.
2. Click Piping Input in the main menu.
The Classic Piping Input dialog box opens.
3. Click Distance on the Input Tools toolbar.
The Distance dialog box opens.
4. Double-click to select the element.
5. Click Origin and selected node.
You must have only one element selected on the model to use the Origin and
selected node option.
The software displays the measured distance from the To node of the element selected to
the origin (first) node in the model.
The distance measurement, including the location of the start and end points, displays in the
Results section of the dialog box and at the bottom of the main CAESAR II window. The
delta DX, DY, DZ boxes at the bottom of the Distance dialog box show the differences of
change along the three axes.
After you select the method for measuring the distance, you can dock the Distance
dialog box to the side. Then, as you measure distances, the results display on the
model and also in the status bar at the bottom of the window.
Press ESC to stop the distance measuring functionality on the model (but leave the
dialog box open), or close the Distance dialog box.

List
Displays all of the applicable input data in a dialog box. You can edit, delete, or modify data in
the lists.
Show All Lists
Displays the all of the available List dialog boxes.
Close All Lists
Closes all of the List dialog boxes and clears (un-checks) all the list options, such as
Allowables, Bends, Elements, and so forth.
The List dialog boxes appear as a rows tabs at the bottom of the piping input. These tabs
specify the various list options that you can access.
When you select a tab, the headings at the top of the selected List dialog box display the
specific input data and controlling parameters in the corresponding columns. All of the input data
can be accessed through the various List dialog boxes.
The following shows an example of a List dialog box, the Elements dialog box.
The software displays the input information in the List dialog boxes in a column format. Move the
cursor into any box to type a new value to replace the original value. You can scroll through the
reports either vertically or horizontally.
Press F1 while within the data cells to display help information. You can delete the input
information by highlighting the selection and pressing Delete. The software supports many
standard Windows commands, such as Cut and Paste, on a box-by-box basis.
If you edit input data on a List dialog box, the software updates the Classic Piping Input dialog
box as well. The software indicates values that carry forward on the Classic Piping Input dialog
box by displaying the value in red if there is a change to the data value. For example, in the
example shown above, the PIPE OD value changes from 8.6250 inch to 6.6250 inch on the
element From Node 30 to To Node 50. The software displays the first element in the list with
the new value in red. Note that elements 2 through 3 inherit the value of element 1
automatically. In this example, the value of the PIPE OD does not change until you enter a new
value for element 4. All elements below element 4 inherit that value unless a new value is
entered.

Other options from the Elements dialog box include the following:
Find the Current Node
Use the Find command (started with Ctrl F or Edit > Find) to quickly jump to the element
where the given node is located. Find remembers the last node number that you typed, so
subsequent searches of the same node can be accomplished by pressing Ctrl F.
Perform Global (Block) Operations
Perform global editing operations on selected parts of the piping system by highlighting an
element row, right-clicking on an element line, and selecting Block Operation and one of
the global (block) options. These options include varieties of rotations, deletions,
duplications, node renumbering, and status reporting. For more information on the block
operations, see Block Operations Toolbar (on page 356).
Access Element Auxiliary Data
Access the Auxiliary Data dialog boxes located on the piping input by highlighting an
element row, right-clicking on an element line, and selecting Block Operation > Aux
Screens. By single-clicking on any checked items from the dialog box shown below the
appropriate Auxiliary Data box displays. You can edit the data in the Auxiliary Data box,
which updates the input dialog box. Additionally, you can type new data by double-clicking
on any of the unchecked boxes to open the Auxiliary Data dialog box. You can delete an
entire Auxiliary Data box by double-clicking on the checked item. A prompt warns you of
the operation.
Display Block Status

View Block Status dialog box, which shows the piping data in the current job and in the
block.

Next Element
Skips to the next element.
Previous Element
Skips to the previous element.
First Element
Skips to the first element.
Last Element
Skips to the last element.
Undo
Reverses or cancels any modeling steps. This can also be accomplished by pressing Ctrl-Z.
You can undo an unlimited number of steps. Undo is limited only by the amount of available
memory.
Making any input change while in the middle of the undo function resets the redo function.
Redo
Repeats the last step done You can redo an unlimited number of steps. Redo is limited by
the amount of available memory.
Making any input change while in the middle of the redo function resets the undo function.
Edit Static Load Cases

Displays the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box. For more information, see
Static Analysis (on page 522).
Edit Dynamic Load Cases

Displays the Dynamic Analysis dialog box displaying static load information. For more
information, see Dynamic Analysis Overview (see "Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems" on page
628).

Review Units
Displays the Review Current Units dialog box. This dialog box displays the units used to create
the report file. Changing the units in the configuration does not affect the input. To change the
input units, click Tools > Change Model Units.
Model Menu
Performs actions associated with modeling, as well as specifying associated system-wide
information.
Break
Divides an element into two or more individual elements.
Click Model > Break on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. This command displays the
Break at element <node> - <node> dialog box.
Break at Element <node> - <node> Dialog Box

Controls options for breaking an element.
A straight run of pipe between two nodes needs to be broken to insert a restraint, or
some other change in properties.
A long straight run of pipe needs to be broken into multiple, uniform lengths of pipe with
similar support conditions on each length. For example, a long straight run of rack
piping, or a buried run with multiple soil supports at each point in the run.

The example above illustrates a single nodal insert between the nodes 10 and 20. The node to
be inserted is 15 and is 6 ft. from the node 10. Alternatively, you could insert node 15 an
appropriate distance from the To node 20. If there was some other node in the model with a
restraint (or imposed displacements), like the one to be put on the newly generated node 15,
then the node identifying that restraint location could be filled in at the line Get Support From
Node and the restraint would be automatically placed at 15. In this case, the +Y support at node
10 is copied to node 15.
For multiple inserts in a rack piping system the dialog box might appear as follows:
If you type the node where a +Y restraint has already been defined at the prompt for "support
condition", a +Y restraint is placed at all of the generated nodes, namely 110, 112, ... , 120. The
multiple insert Break is used primarily for three reasons:
Rack piping supports where the total length and node spacing is known and typed
directly when requested at the prompts.
Underground pipe runs where the overall length of the run is known, and the lengths of
the individual elements in the run are known.
To add mass points in order to refine a model for dynamic analysis.
Break does not work when the element is an expansion joint or the delta dimensions in
the DX, DY, and DZ boxes are blank or zero.
Insert Single Node
Indicates that only one node is inserted.
Insert Multiple Nodes
Indicates that more than one node is inserted.

Single Node Information

New Node Number
Indicates the node number for the inserted node.
Distance in (in.) from Node <node number>
Specifies the distance from the selected node.
Multiple Node Information

Total Number of Break Elements
Specifies the number of elements to insert.
Node Step
Specifies the increment between node numbers.
Length of each element
Displays the length of each element to insert.
Allow Duplicate Node Numbers
Indicates that duplicate node numbers are allowed.
Get Support From Node
Specifies the node from which to copy support information.
Valve
Provides access to the valve and flange databases. This command displays the Valve
and Flange Database: <database name> dialog box.
Valve and Flange Database: <database name> Dialog Box

There are currently four databases provided:
CRANE steel valves and total flange length
GENERIC valves and 2/3 flange length
Corner and Lada valves - no flanges
CADWorx Plant (this is the CAESAR II default)
CAESAR II automatically generates data lengths and weights of rigid elements for flange-valve
-flange combinations when you select the Flange-Valve-Flange check box.

The CRANE database contains all flanged and welded fittings in the CRANE steel valve catalog.
The GENERIC database contains information from a variety of sources. In some cases, such as
weights for control valves, information from different sources was found to vary considerably. In
these cases the largest reasonable weight was selected for use in the database. In other cases
only the length of the fitting was available.
The default database, CADWorx Plant, is a subset of the full component database provided
with CADWorx Plant, Intergraph CAS's piping design and drafting software. This database
offers nine different component types (gate, globe, check, control, ball, plug, butterfly valves,
flange pair, and single flange) as well as four different end types (flanged, no-flanged, threaded,
or socket). Selection of flanged-end components or flanges themselves automatically provides
for gaskets.

Selecting flanged ends (FLG) for a valve simply adds the length and weight of two
flanges and gaskets to the valve length and weight. NOFLG selects a valve without including the
two mating flanges.
Rigid Type
Specifies the rigid type for the fitting.
End Type
Specifies the end type for the fitting.
Class
Specifies the class for the fitting.
Whole element
Indicates that the selections apply to the whole element.
From end
Indicates that the selections apply to the From end of the fitting.
To end
Indicates that the selections apply to the To end of the fitting.
Both ends
Indicates that the selections apply to both ends of the fitting.
Flange-Valve-Flange
Automatically generates data lengths and weights of rigid elements for flange-valve-flange
combinations.

Activate Flange Check

Turns on the flange check.
Add an Element from the Valve Flange Database

1. Type the node numbers for the rigid element in the From and To boxes on the Classic
Piping Input dialog box.
2. Click Valve/Flange on the toolbar, or click Model > Valve from the menu.
3. Highlight blocks to select the fitting.
4. Select where to insert the new element.
Clicking the Flange Valve Flange check box enables CAESAR II to generate three
RIGID elements whose length and weight are automatically populated with data from the
Valve/Flange database.
5. Click OK to accept the selection.
If the particular selection is valid for the current line size, CAESAR II displays the length of
the element in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes, designates the element as RIGID, and inserts the
weight in the appropriate slot in the Auxiliary box.
The assumed orientation of the rigid is taken from the preceding element. CAESAR II is doing a
table lookup based on line-size and is inserting the selected table values into the dialog box.
Should the line size change at a later time, you must come back and ask CAESAR II to perform
another table look-up for the new size.
Use of the CADWorx Plant database offers several benefits over the use of other databases:
The CADWorx Plant database provides more accurate component lengths and weights
than those typically available in the GENERIC database.
Using the same component data for CAESAR II and CADWorx Plant modeling promotes
the efficiency of the bi-directional interface between them. Total sharing of data files and
specifications between CAESAR II and CADWorx Plant occurs when the CADWorx
installation option is saved in the registry. In that case, you should edit the third line of the
CADWORX.VHD file to name the actual CADWorx specifications. These specifications are
located in the CADWORX\SPEC subfolder. For more information on editing this file, see
below.
You can more easily modify the CADWorx Plant Valve and Flange database, because the
specification files and component data files are ASCII text files. This process, which involves
possibly editing the CADWORX.VHD, specification, and data files, is described below.
The CADWORX.VHD file is structured as follows:
The first line must read CADWORX.DAT. It must not be changed.

The second line is editable. It must begin with a zero. The second number on the line
designates the number of specifications to make available. It can be a maximum of 7.
The third line is editable. It lists the available specifications. Each specification name must
consist of 8 characters, padded by blanks on the right. The specification names designate
files with extension .SPC, located in the SPEC subfolder of the CAESAR II or the CADWorx
Plant specification folder (if the CADWORX option is set in the registry).
The fourth line is editable. It designates whether each specification uses English or Metric
nominal pipe sizes. Seven blanks followed by a 1 indicate an English nominal, while seven
blanks followed by a 2 indicate a metric nominal.
The last five lines are not editable.
The specification files are located in the SPEC subfolder of the CAESAR installation folder. They
are designated by the extension .SPC. The specification files correlate pipe size and component
with the appropriate data file. Individual lines in the file list the library subfolder to the LIB_I or
LIB_M folder, depending on whether English or Metric units are in effect), file name (with an
extension equal to the library name), range of nominal pipe sizes for which the specified data file
applies. You can edit any of these items. The last item on the line is the component type
number, and should not be changed. Other items in the file pertain to CADWorx Plant and are
not significant to CAESAR II.
The data files hold the dimensional and weight values. Data files for different types of
components hold different types of data. The data columns are labeled. The only data with
significance to CAESAR II involves the weight and lengths. You can change these values. The
following is a typical component data file for weld neck flanges:

You can find more extensive information on editing these files in the CADWorx Plant User
Manual.
Expansion Joint
Displays the Expansion Joint Database <data file> and Expansion Joint Modeler
dialog boxes.
Expansion Joint Dialog Box

CAESAR II automatically generates an expansion joint model from catalog data that you select.
The catalog used may be selected in the CAESAR II Configure/Setup routine. You decide where
in the model the expansion joint should go, that is, between which two nodes, and the modeler
assembles the completed joint. Selectable joint styles include Untied, Tied, Hinged, Gimbaled,
Untied-Universal, and Tied Universal expansion joints.

An example selection session is illustrated as follows. Of particular note are the following items:
You can select any of four material types. These material types are used to adjust the
bellows stiffnesses to the actual highest temperature in the model. This typically results in
higher stiffnesses than those shown in the vendor's catalog because the stiffnesses in the
catalog may be based on a higher design temperature.
You can select any combination of end types.
Bellows, liner, cover, rod, and hinge or gimbal assembly weights are looked up from the
stored database and automatically included in the expansion joint model.
For universal joints, the minimum allowed length is stored, but when the available space
exceeds the minimum allowed, you are prompted for the length that you want the expansion
joint assembly to occupy.
The last screen that follows shows the "proposed" model before it is inserted into the
CAESAR II input. This allows you to investigate the characteristics of several joints before
settling on one.
Actual maximum pressure ratings are also a part of the database, and in many cases
exceed the nominal pressure rating shown in the catalog. You can use pressures up to
these actual allowed maximums.
Allowed joint movements are also stored as part of the database and are printed with each
proposed model. These values should be recorded for use in checking the model after a
successful design pass has been completed.
Pressure thrust is included in the modeling considerations for each of the expansion joint
styles, removing this concern.
In the case of "tied" expansion joints, rigid elements are used to model the tie-bars.
Restraints with connecting nodes are used to contain the pressure thrust, and to keep the
ends of the expansion joint parallel.


Expansion Joint Modeler - From / To Nodes

Indicates whether the expansion joint assembly should be installed at the From end or the
To end of the current element if the length of the current element exceeds the length of the
expansion joint assembly.

Expansion Joint Modeler - Hinge/Pin Axis

Specifies the direction cosines which define the axis of the hinge pin of the expansion joint
assembly. That is, the axis about which the joint can rotate.
For example, if the hinge can rotate about the X-axis, type:1.0 0.0 0.0
Expansion Joint Modeler - Tie Bar Plane

Specifies the direction cosines corresponding to a line drawn from the mid-point of one tie
rod to the mid-point of the other. If an expansion joint has only two tie rods permitting
rotation about the plane defined by the tie rods, type the direction cosines which, when
crossed with the axis of the expansion joint assembly, define the plane.
In this example, you would enter VX as1.000, VY as -0.000, and VZ as 0.000.
Expansion Joint Modeler - Overall Length

Specifies the length of the universal joint. Alternatively, select the check box to default the
joint length to the shortest recommended length. The length of a universal joint is variable
depending upon the length of the intermediate spool piece.
Expansion Joint Modeler - Expansion Joint Database

Specifies the database to use in the modeler. The current expansion joint vendor provides
multiple databases.
You can change the default expansion joint vendor in Expansion Joints (on page 59).
Torsional Spring Rates

Type a large value such as 1E10 if the torsional spring rate is unknown. This produces
conservative results. These results are conservative with respect to loads and
non-conservative with respect to displacements. It is very common to rate the bellows
allowed torsion by the amount of rotation that it experiences. Large torsional stiffnesses
result in small, seemingly satisfactory rotations. When results from a piping analysis are
communicated back to the expansion joint manufacturer, it is important to report both the
rotation and the stiffness used to produce that rotation. For more information, see Expansion
Joints (on page 885).
Expansion Joint Design Notes

It was common practice in the expansion joint industry to design expansion joint bellows and
hardware (restraints) for the system pressure, and pressure thrust only. Generally, no
consideration was given to the system deadweight or thermal forces. This poor practice was
tolerated before the wide-spread use of piping analysis software because:
The deadweight and thermal forces are normally small compared to the pressure
and pressure thrust.
Designers laid out expansion joints so that the thermal forces were very low and
therefore not significant.
The allowable stresses used in hardware designs have a significant safety factor.

The forces and moments generally were not known. Today, when an expansion joint is
modeled, it is recommended that al information relating to the joint be submitted to the
expansion joint manufacturer. This is especially true of the forces and moments resulting
from the operating loads, such as deadweight, thermal forces, and operating deflections.
Better evaluations of the loading conditions on the bellows and hardware simply help the
manufacturer make sure that his design is suited for the intended installation and service.
Expansion Joint Modeler - Modeler Results

Click Build to insert the proposed model of the expansion joint assembly into the piping
system model.
The Bellows Catalog Data (at the bottom of the Expansion Joint Modeler dialog box)
shows the bellows stiffness parameters and allowable movements from the vendor catalog.
Note the allowable movements for later evaluation of the expansion joint.
Expansion Joint Modeler Notes

Expansion joints cannot be inserted on an element that is either already rigid or an
expansion joint. Bends, however, can be at either end of the element where you are
inserting the expansion.
You do not have to give a length on the element where you are inserting the expansion joint.
The six types of expansion joint models supported currently by CAESAR II are:
Untied single bellows
Tied single bellows
Hinged single bellows
Gimbaled single bellows
Untied universal bellows
Tied universal bellows
The four possible joint end types are:
Welded-end
Slip-on flange
Weld neck flange
Plate flange
If the length of the element to receive the expansion joint model is given, then the expansion
joint assembly should fit within this length. If it does not, a warning message displays. If a
universal joint has been requested, the length of the receiving element should be at least
long enough to accept the smallest possible universal length, as defined by the minimum
spool piece size from the manufacturers' database. If the element to receive the universal
expansion joint model is zero, you are prompted for the expansion joint length. If the
element to receive the universal expansion joint model had an original length, then the
maximum possible space available for the universal is reported and you are asked for the
length. If the element to receive any expansion joint is longer than the expansion joint to be
inserted, you are prompted for the end of the element where the joint should be inserted.
Overall universal lengths should be limited to about 10 times the pipe diameter before the
center spool piece weight begins to become a problem.

If there is a bend at either the From or the To end of the element to receive the expansion
joint, then you must define the length of the element.
To find extra nodes needed for the expansion joint model, CAESAR II starts with the
element From node and increments by one until a sufficient number of nodes not used
elsewhere in the model are encountered. It is these nodes that are reported in the
Proposed-model dialog box.
Angular stiffnesses reported are given in the current set of units. Only the translational
stiffness label is found at the top of the bellows stiffness report. If you are unsure about the
rotational stiffness units, they may be seen either in the help screens or in the UNITS report
from the LIST option.
You are prompted to adjust the stiffness for the expansion joint if the highest operating
temperature is given and not equal to the expansion joint catalog design temperature. This
reduces bellows stiffnesses greater than those published in the catalog.
Bellows, tie-bar, and hinge/gimbal assembly weights are combined together and distributed
over the expansion joint rigid end pieces.
The expansion joint modeler makes every attempt possible to generate nodes in the model
that are unique. Inspect the nodes that are generated closely and make sure that you do not
use them unintentionally in any future model building.
Review the generated CAESAR II models and be sure that everything is consistent with
your intentions.
Expansion Joint Styles

The following six styles of expansion joints are built automatically by CAESAR II. With each
type is a brief discussion of its use when associated with hot, pressurized equipment
protection.
Untied
Specifies a single unrestrained expansion joint. This type of joint can absorb movement in
all directions. It also subjects the system to pressure thrust which must be designed for,
external to the expansion joint. This type of joint should almost never be used by the
expansion joint novice needing to protect hot, pressurized equipment. Guide restrictions
limiting displacements into the joint, regular maintenance problems because of all of the
support hardware away from the bellows, and pressure thrust make using and analyzing this
type of bellows difficult.
Tied
Specifies a tied single expansion joint that is capable only of transverse (lateral) movement.
Pressure thrust is restrained internally by the tie-bars. This is a good, dependable expansion
joint to use for several reasons:
You do not have to design for pressure thrust.
Tie rods provide stability to the overall joint. This makes working with it in the field
easier.
There is a single displacement mode (lateral). You can compare this mode directly
to the rated lateral movement in the catalog without the need for the relatively
complicated geometric calculations in the Expansion Joint Rating.
The disadvantages to the single tied expansion joint are:

They are fairly stiff in practice. This joint often does not provide the needed flexibility
to sufficiently reduce the loads on sensitive equipment.
The tie-bar assembly does provide some nonlinear restraining effect on flexibility
that is unaccounted for in the analysis. This may be appreciable when the bellows
displacement becomes large, such as when it is most critical that it perform as
predicted.
Hinged
Specifies a single hinged expansion joint. This type of joint can only angulate about one
axis. Pressure thrust is retained internally by the hinge mechanism. Hinge joints are often
used in pairs to absorb considerable displacement in a single plane while transmitting very
little load to any attached equipment. The piping system must be designed to assure that
displacement into the hinges is planar for all types of thermal and occasional loadings to be
experienced by the system. Where pressure loads to be absorbed by the hinge mechanism
are high, considerable friction forces can be generated that somewhat limits further flexing
of the joint. This transmits larger loads than expected back into the piping system.
Gimbal
Specifies a single gimbal expansion joint. This type of joint can angulate about two axes.
Gimbaled joints restrain both pressure thrust and torsion by the gimbal mechanism. These
joints are often used in pairs to absorb considerable displacement in several directions,
while transmitting very little load to any attached equipment.
U-UNIV
Specifies an untied universal expansion joint. This type of unit is similar to a single
unrestrained expansion joint. It can absorb movement in all directions and normally has a
much higher capacity for transverse (lateral) deflection than a single bellows. An untied
universal subjects the system to pressure thrust loads which must be designed for external
to the expansion joint. Even when pressure is negligible, these joints can often be difficult to
use in practice unless proper guiding of the thermal displacement protects the joint against
unwanted movement.
T-UNIV
Specifies a tied universal expansion joint. This is similar to a tied single joint, except that the
tied universal has much higher transverse (lateral) movement capability. Pressure thrust
loads are restrained internally by the tie-bars. These types of joints are a good option where
vertical pipe runs close to the equipment are available. The tie-bars restrict movement to a
single mode (lateral) and eliminate the worry about pressure thrust design. Longer lengths
result in smaller lateral stiffnesses, but overall length is somewhat restricted by the weight of
the center spool. A good rule of thumb is to restrict the overall length of the assembly to ten
times the pipe diameter. Be careful not to put the assembly into compression, as the tie bar
mechanisms are not designed to take this load and damage to the bellows can result.
These six types of expansion joints are not all of the types available, but they are the most
common. If a joint is needed that is not covered by the above, select the style closest to that
required. Edit the resulting input after the EJ Modeler is complete and processing returns to
the Classic Piping Input dialog box.

Available Expansion Joint End-Types

The following expansion joint end-types are available in the CAESAR II modeler.
Welded
Indicates standard pipe beveled for welding.
Slipon
Indicates a slip-on flange.
WN
Indicates a weld neck flange.
Plate
Indicates a plate flange in accordance with the manufacturers catalog.
Slip-on, weld neck, and plate flanges may not be available in all diameters and pressure
ratings, such as over 24-in. diameters. Consult the catalog for specific interface dimensions,
codes, and materials. When you select a combination that is not available, you are warned
that there are no database values for his particular geometry and line size.
Bellows Application Notes

The following considerations are important when selecting the number of convolutions for a
particular application:
Movement Capability
The more convolutions selected, the greater the movement capacity of the bellows. It is a
common practice to perform a quick hand calculation to estimate the required movement
and then select the number of convolutions from the rated movements in the catalog. After
an analysis is performed, the exact evaluation of the bellows performance can be made
using the expansion joint rating module provided with CAESAR II.
Spring Forces
Specifies the spring forces. The more convolutions that you select, the lower the resulting
bellows spring forces become. This is particularly critical when the expansion joint is located
near rotating equipment.

Available Space
The more convolutions selected, the greater the required overall length. If working in a
confined area, the number of convolutions may be restricted by the space.
Pressure Rating
The pressure rating should be equal to, or larger than the design pressure of the system. In
many instances, larger pressures can be tolerated than the rated pressure shown. In many
small diameter expansion joints, the same bellows is used in 50, 150, and 300 psi-rated
joints. The CAESAR II modeler contains the true minimum pressure limits for all of the
bellows in the database, and checks the maximum pressure in the line (as specified) against
the allowed pressure. This allows you to select a smaller joint with more flexibility for certain
applications.
Materials
Bellows can be formed from most ductile materials that can be welded by the automatic
T.I.G. butt welding process and yield a homogeneous ductile weld structure. Because the
specific media content varies from system to system, and most media data specified prior to
system operation is approximate with considerable fluctuation possible, it is not feasible to
make specific recommendations concerning bellows materials. The following are the four
most common bellows materials that are supported by CAESAR II:
304SSA240 tp 304 Stainless Steel
316SSA240 tp 316 Stainless Steel
600IncInco 600 High Nickel
625IncInco 625 High Nickel
Liners
Internal liners smooth the flow through the expansion joint. The smooth flow reduces
pressure drop and also prevents flow-induced vibration of the bellows. Liners are generally
recommended when the flow velocity exceeds 1.3 ft./sec. as a minimum, and are definitely
recommended when the flow velocity exceeds about 25 ft./sec. Consult the manufacturers
catalog for additional information. Heavy gage liners should be used in high velocity or
turbulent flow systems. Also, heavy liners should be used when the media is abrasive.
Covers
External covers protect very thin bellows, (0.010 to 0.090 in.) from mechanical damage.
Covers are also recommended when the line is insulated.

Title Page
Displays the title page of the current job. This is up to 60 lines of text that is stored with
the problem, and may be used for detailing run histories, discussing assumptions, and so
on. These lines may be printed with the output report through the input echo.
Hanger Design Control Data

Specifies hanger design criteria for the current model.
Hanger Design Control Data Dialog Box

Spring hanger design can be globally controlled by typing data into the Hanger Design Control
Data dialog box.
The Hanger Design Control Data dialog box contains five items that also appear on each
individual hanger design in your model. The software populates values you specify in this dialog
box on the individual Hangers auxiliary dialog box in the Classic Piping Input. However, you
can override those values on a hanger-by-hanger basis on the individual Hangers auxiliary
dialog box.
The hanger values you can set globally include:
Short-range springs
Rigid support displacement criteria
Maximum-allowed travel limit
Hanger table
Multiple load-case design option

You can specify the number of temperature cases the software uses in the hanger design in the
Hanger Design Control Data dialog box, and these values are used in the hanger design
algorithm. In addition, you can specify if the software calculates the actual cold loads. For
examples of incorporating spring hanger designs into your models, see the CAESAR II
Application Guide.
No. of Hanger - Design Operating Load Cases

Specifies the number of load cases to be considered when designing spring hangers. This
value may be between 1 and 9 and corresponds to the number of thermal load cases to be
used in hanger design. If more than one operating case is to be considered in the hanger
design then you must also select the Multiple Load Case Design Option to use.
Calculate Actual Cold Loads

Indicates that CAESAR II makes one additional pass after the hanger design is completed
and the hangers are installed, to determine the actual installed loads that should be used
when the hangers are first installed and the load flanges adjusted in the field. This
calculation tends to be important in the following situations:
The stiffness of the piping system is small.
The stiffness of the hanger selected is high.
The hanger travel is large. This is usually more important in smaller diameter piping
systems that are spring supported away from equipment nozzles.
Actual cold loads should be calculated when springs in smaller diameter lines are to be

adjusted in the cold position.
Allow Short Range Springs

Indicates that hanger design allows short range springs.
CAESAR II gives you the option of excluding short range springs from consideration from
the selection algorithms. Short range springs are considered specialty items in some
instances and are not used unless their shorter length is required for clearance reasons.
Clear this check box in this case.
If this option is not selected, CAESAR II selects a mid-range spring over a short-range
spring, assuming that they are more standard, readily available, and in general cheaper than
their short-range counterparts.
If the default should be that short range springs are used wherever possible, then check the
box on the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.
Allowable Load Variation (%)

Specifies the limit on the allowed variation between the hot and cold hanger loads. If this
value is not specified, the only limit on load variation is that inherent in the spring table. This
is approximately 100% when the hot load is smaller than the cold load and 50% when the
hot load is larger than the cold load. Hot loads are smaller than cold loads whenever the
operating displacement in the Y direction is positive. The default value for the load variation
is 25%.
The Allowable Load Variation value is the percentage variation from the hot load:
or as may be more familiar:
The Allowable Load Variation value is typed as a percentage. For example, type twenty
five percent as 25.0.
Rigid Support Displacement Criteria

Specifies the minimum amount of travel for hanger design. This is a cost saving feature that
replaces unnecessary springs with rigid rods.
The hanger design algorithm operates by first running a restrained weight case. The load to
be supported by the hanger in the operating condition is determined from this case. After the
hanger design load is known, the software runs an operating case with the hot hanger load
installed. This analysis determines the travel at the hanger location. If this determined
hanger travel is less than the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria, then a rigid Y-support
is selected instead of a spring for the location.
The software does not apply the criteria if you leave the Rigid Support Displacement
Criteria box blank or zero.
A typical value is 0.1 in.
You should insert a single directional restraint instead of a rigid rod in some

cases. Rigid rods are double-acting restraints. In some cases these can develop large hold
down forces that do not really exist because the support has lifted off, or because the rigid
rod has bowed slightly. When this condition develops, you should rerun the hanger design
inserting single directional restraints where rigid rods were put in by CAESAR II.
Do not replace hangers with rigid rods in very stiff parts of the piping system. These parts
are usually associated with rotating equipment or vessel nozzles that need to be protected.
Maximum Allowed Travel Limit

Specifies the maximum amount of travel for hanger design. CAESAR II selects a constant
effort support if the design operating travel exceeds this limit, even though a variable
support from the manufacturer table would have been satisfactory in every other respect.
You can design a constant effort hanger by specifying a very small number for the
Maximum Allowed Travel Limit. A value of 0.001 typically forces CAESAR II to select a
constant effort support for a particular location.
Hanger Table
Specifies the active hanger table.
The following spring tables are currently included in CAESAR II:
1. Anvil 2. Bergen Power
3. Power Piping 4. NPS Industries
5. Lisega 6. Fronek
7. Piping Technology 8. Capitol
9. Piping Services 10. Basic Engineers
11. Inoflex 12. E. Myatt & Co.
13. Sinopec 14. BHEL
15. CASTIM 2000 (formerly Flexider) 16. Carpenter & Paterson
17. Pipe Supports Ltd. 18. Witzenmann
19. Sarathi 20. Myricks
21. China Power 22. Pipe Supports USA
23. Quality Pipe Supports 24. PiHASA
25. Binder 26. Gradior
27. NHK 28. PSSI GmbH
29. Seonghwa 30. Mitsubishi

31. Yamashita 32. Sanwa Tekki
33. Techno Industry 34. Hesterberg
35. Spring Supports Mfg. Co. 36. Senior
37. Unison 38. Wookwang
Additional design options are invoked if you use the following check boxes.
Extended Range
Cold Load
Hot load centered (if possible)
You can globally set the hanger data for a model from the Hanger Design Control Data
dialog box (see "Hanger Design Control Data" on page 262), accessed by clicking Hanger
design criteria in the piping input. Specify the default hanger table that appears in this
dialog by specifying the Default Spring Hanger Table configuration setting in
Configuration Editor > Database Definitions. For examples of incorporating spring
hanger designs into your models, see the Hangers section in the CAESAR II Application
Guide.
Extended Load Range Springs - CAESAR II includes the maximum load range to permit
the selection of less expensive variable support hangers in place of constant effort supports
when the spring loads are just outside the manufacturers recommended range. Extended
load ranges are the most extreme ranges on the spring load table. Some manufacturers
build double-spring supports to accommodate this range. Others adjust the top or bottom
travel limits to accommodate either end of the extended table. Make sure that the
manufacturer can supply the spring before you use the maximum ranges. Use of the
extended range often eliminates the need to go to a constant effort support.
Lisega springs do not support an extended range. If you select Extended Range for
a hanger with Lisega springs, CAESAR II returns the standard Lisega spring table and
ranges.
Cold Load Spring Hanger Design - Cold load spring hanger design is a method of
designing the springs in which the hot (or operating) load is supported in the cold (or
installed) position of the piping. This method of spring design offers several
advantages over the more usual hot load design:
Hanger stops are easier to remove.
There is no excessive movement from the neutral position when the system is cold
or when the stops are removed.
Spring loads can be adjusted before the system is brought up to temperature.
Some feel that the cold load approach yields a much more dependable design.
Operating loads on connected equipment are lower in some system configurations.
A hot vertical riser anchored at the bottom turning horizontally into a nozzle
connection is a typical configuration resulting in this load-reduction. The spring to be
designed is at the elbow adjacent to the nozzle. Operating loads are lower because
the difference between the hot and cold loads counters the moment produced by
the vertical thermal expansion from the anchor.

The disadvantages to cold load design are:

In some systems, the loads on rotating equipment may be increased by a value
proportional to the spring rate times the travel in the hot condition.
Most installations are done on a hot load design basis.
Middle of the Table Hanger Design (Hot Load Centered) - Many designers prefer that the
hot load be centered as closely as possible to the middle of the spring table. This provides
as much variability as possible in both directions before the spring bottoms out when the
system is hot. This design was necessary prior to effective computer modeling of piping
systems, when the weights at hangers were approximated by chart methods or calculated
by hand. Activating this option does not guarantee that spring hot loads are at the middle of
the spring table, but CAESAR II makes every effort to move the hot load to this position. The
CAESAR II design algorithm goes to a higher size spring if the design load is closer to the
middle of the larger spring's range, but never switches spring types. This option, when it is
effective, can only result in a one-size larger spring. CAESAR II attempts to move the hot
load to the next higher spring when it is within 10% of the maximum travel range for the
spring. If the new spring is not satisfactory, then CAESAR II uses the old one.
Multiple Load Case Design Options

Specifies the multiple load case design option. Whenever more than one thermal load case
is used in the hanger sizing algorithm, CAESAR II must know how you want to weigh the
results from the different cases. There are currently 13 different methods that you can use
for multiple load case hanger design selection. These 13 methods are described in greater
detail under the hanger auxiliary data section.
1. Design per Load Case #1
10. Design for the maximum operating load
11. Design for the maximum travel
12. Design for the average load and the average travel
13. Design for the maximum load and the maximum travel

Seismic Wizard
Selects a particular Seismic Code and its associated data.
The wizard computes the applicable g factor and fills in the appropriate data cells.
X-component is set into Vector 1, Y-component is set into Vector 2, and Z-component is set
into Vector 3; all other load components are set to zero.
A warning displays if the current element has uniform loads defined.
Because the wizard sets data in gravitational loading, you must verify other uniform load
definitions for correctness.
Seismic Design Code

Specifies the design code and edition for the current job. You can select from several different
seismic code standards.
See Also
ASCE Static Seismic Wizard (on page 268)
CFE Sismo Static Seismic Wizard (see "NBC Static Seismic Wizard" on page 273)
NBC Static Seismic Wizard (on page 273)
ASCE Static Seismic Wizard

Computes the static g factor based on the ASCE 7 (or IBC) methodology. Select your Seismic
Design Code edition.
CAESAR II displays the calculated gravity factor on the Uniform Loads tab.

Uniform Loads Tab
Importance Factor I (ASCE)

Specifies the component importance factor from ASCE #7 Section 11.5.1. Type 1.5 for
life-safety components, components containing hazardous material, or components that are
required for continuous operation. Type 1.0 for all others.
Response Factor R (ASCE)

Specifies the component response modification factor, from ASCE #7 Table 13.6-1. Type
12.0 for piping according to ASME B31 with joints made by welding or brazing. Type a value
range as low as 3.0 for other joints and for less ductile materials.
Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Ss (ASCE)

Specifies the maximum mapped MCE spectral response acceleration at short periods
according to Section 11.4.1, Chapter 22 Seismic Ground Motion and Long-period
Transition Maps provide values for Ss.
Site Class (ASCE)

Specifies the site class code. Based on the soil properties, the site is classified as Site Class
A, B, C, D, E, or F according to Chapter 20, Site Classification Procedure for Seismic
Design. If you do not know the soil properties in sufficient detail to determine the site class,
use Site Class D.
Component Elevation Ratio z/h (ASCE)

Specifies the ratio of height in structure at the point of attachment over the average height of
the supporting structure.

Component Amplification Factor ap (ASCE)

Specifies the component amplification factor from Table 13.6-1. Type 2.5 for distribution
system, such as piping. This term reflects the relationship of the piping response to the
structure response.
Long-Period Transition Period TL

Specifies the period of time for a longer-period structure when generating an ASCE 7
Spectrum Type in Dynamic Analysis. TL is determined from new maps, which are similar to
zone maps, for all 50 states. The ASCE standard provides these maps in Figures 22-12
through 22-16 (ASCE 7-2010). In addition, Section 11.4.5 of ASCE 7-2010, discussions the
constant-displacement branch of the code.
ASCE Example
For further information on the Seismic Wizard see the example below.
Importance Factor IP = 1
Component Response Modification Factor RP = 12.0, from Table 13.6-1, "Piping in accordance
with ASME B31,"
Mapped MCE Spectral Response Acceleration S s = 1.552, Mapped MCE Spectral Response
Acceleration at short periods according to Section 11.4.1.
Site Coefficient (Fa) = 1.0 for Site Class D, according to Table 11.4-1.
Maximum Considered Earthquake MCE S MS - The MCE is adjusted for site class effects as
defined in Section 11.4.3,
SMS = Fa SS = 1.552
SDS - Design elastic response acceleration at short period (0.2 sec), from Section 11.4.4.
SDS= 2/3 SMS = 2/3 * 1.552 = 1.0347
The appropriate seismic acceleration is aH
= [ (0.4aPSDS) / ( RP / IP )] ( 1 + 2z/h)
= [(0.4 x 2.5 x 1.0347)/(12.0/1.0)](1 + 2 * 0.5)
= 0.17245
Check limits on aH:
aH <= 1.6 * SDS* IP = 1.6 * 1.0347 * 1.0 = 1.65552
aH >= 0.3 * SDS * IP = 0.3 * 1.0347 * 1.0 = 0.31041
aH = 0.31041
aH = 0.2 SDS= 0.2 * 1.0347 = 0.20694,
Section 13.1.7 states, "The earthquake loads determined in accordance with Section 13.3.1
shall be multiplied by a factor of 0.7."
aH = 0.7 * 0.31041 = 0.2173
av = 0.7 * 0.20694 = 0.1149

CFE Sismo Static Seismic Wizard

Computes the static g factor based on the Manual De Diseno por Sismo (Seismic Design
Manual) 1993 methodology.
CFE Sismo Seismic Wizard

Uniform Loads Tab
Seismic Zone (CFE)

Specifies the seismic zone. Zone D is the zone of highest seismic activity. Zone A is the
least active. For more information, review the Manual De Diseno por Sismo (Seismic
Design Manual). A map with different regions displays on page 1.3.29.

Structure Group (CFE)

Specifies the structural group as defined in the following table:
Group A High Degree of Safety
Group B Intermediate Degree of Safety
Group C Low Degree of Safety
Soil Type (CFE)

Specifies the soil type as defined in the following table:
Ground deposits formed exclusively by layers with propagation velocity bo = 700

I Hard Soil
m/s or modulus of rigidity >= 85000 t/m2
Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective velocity of

II Med. Soil
propagation which meets the condition: c5 5c cc
Ground deposits with fundamental period of effective vibration of propagation

III Soft Soil
which meets the conditions: c5 5c cc
First Mode Period (CFE)

Specifies the period of first natural mode of the piping system in seconds.
Increase Factor (CFE)

Specifies the increase factor. The Mexican Earthquake Code considers an SRSS type effect
on the structure. This value scales up the earthquake loads in a linear (Scalar) fashion. This
value is traditionally 1.118 and should always be greater or equal to 1.0.
CFE Sismo Example

For further information on CFE Sismo, see the example below.
For seismic zone D and soil type I, the following parameters are found in Table 3.1.
a0 = 0.50
C = 0.50
Ta (s) = 0.0
Tb (s) = 0.0
r=
If T> Tb , then
a = c ( Ta / Tb)r = 0.50 * (0.6 / 1.15) ^ 0.5 = 0.3612
For a structure group of A High Safety, the acceleration is multiplied by 1.5

a = 0.3612 * 1.5 = 0.5417

NBC Static Seismic Wizard

Computes the static g factor based on the NBC 2005 methodology.

Importance Factor IE (NBC)

Specifies the importance factor as defined in Article 4.1.8.5 as defined in the following table:
Importance Category Importance Factor (IE)
Low 0.8
Normal 1.0
High 1.3
Post-disaster 1.5
Site Class (NBC)

Specifies the site classification for the seismic site response from Table 4.1.8.4.A.
Sa(0.2) (NBC)
Specifies the spectral response acceleration value at 0.2 seconds as defined in Paragraph
4.1.8.4.(1).
Component Elevation Ratio [hx/hn] (NBC)

Specifies the component elevation ratio. The values hx and hn are the height above the
base to level n or x respectively. The base of the structure is the level at which horizontal
earthquake motions are imparted to the structure.
Component Amplification Factor [Rp] (NBC)

Specifies the force amplification factor from Table 4.1.8.17.
Element or Component Factor [Cp] (NBC)

Specifies the component factor from Table 4.1.8.17.
Component Force Amp. Factor [Ar] (NBC)

Specifies the component response modification factor from Table 4.1.8.17.

NBC Example
For further information on the use of the Static Seismic Wizard see the example below.
Importance Factor IE = 1.0 for a "Normal" category by Table 4.1.8.5.
The Site Class is "C" for "Very dense soil and soft rock" by Table 1.1.8.4.A:
Sa (0.2) = 0.55, spectral response acceleration value at 0.2 s, as defined in Sentence
4.1.8.4.(1).
According to Table 4.1.8.4.B.,Fa = 1.0:
Sp = Cp Ar Ax / Rp = 1 * 1 * (1 + 2 * 0.5) / 3 = 0.6667
Cp = 1, Ar = 1 and Rp = 3 according to Table 4.1.8.17.
The maximum value of Sp is 4.0 and minimum value of Sp is 0.7, therefore:
Sp = 0.7
aH= 0.3 * Fa Sa (0.2)IE Sp = 0.3 * 1.0 * 0.55 * 1.0 * 0.7 = 0.1155
Optimization Wizard
Assists with expansion loop design.
This wizard allows you to specify the element into which the loop should be incorporated, the
loop type, the item to be optimized - nodal stress or restraint load, and the target value to which
the item should be optimized. The optimization routines run the analysis several times to arrive
at an acceptable loop size such that the code stress or restraint load on the target element is at
the specified limit. Besides offering the opportunity to specify various loop configurations and a
selection of height to width ratios, the wizard also provides an option to allow CAESAR II to
select the most economical (based on length of pipe and number of bends) of those possible.
The Optimization Wizard automatically chooses the most economical loop solution
based on your target input. If there is an issue with the target input or loop sizing, the wizard
prompts you and attempts to insert the most ideal loop possible. However, you can always
revise your target input or loop sizing and re-run the wizard.

To use the optimization wizard, the job must be run at least once so that there is an issue, such
as an overstress, to resolve. These results must be current. The process is illustrated by the
example LOOP-WIZARD.C2, as displayed below.
Reviewing the results of the LOOP-WIZARD job shows that it is suffering an expansion
overstress of 46,741 psi. The allowable value at node 20 is 41,288 psi. This is due to the
expansion of the long run 60-140. A loop should be installed somewhere along that run. The
questions are where, and how big should it be?
Before you start the Loop Optimizer, examine the area of the plant surrounding the piping
system. To do this, import the CADWorx (or AutoCAD) plant model, using the CADWorx Model
command. In this case, import the ...\EXAMPLES\LOOP-WIZARD-PLANT\OVERALL.DWG
model. This model shows that there is a convenient area to place a loop beside element 60-70.

Select element 60-70 and then click Model > Optimization Wizard start the Loop
Optimization Wizard. The Loop Design Wizard dialog box displays.

Using the Loop Optimization Wizard:

1. Loop 60-70 is already indicated as the element upon which the loop is installed. You can
change this value by selecting a different value from the list, or by selecting other elements
in the model.
2. Click Stress as the optimization type. Optionally, you can optimize restraint load
components as well.
3. Select EXP from the Load Case list. This fills in the element list showing stresses on the left
side of the dialog box.
4. Type 36,000 in the Stress box to define a target maximum stress. This value refines the
element list, so that it displays only those elements with stress levels higher than the target.
5. Select the Max Stress box to limit the maximum stress in the system to the target value.
6. Select the Loop Type from the available icons. For this example, select the first loop type.
7. Select <none> from the Height to Width Ratio list to allow the loop height to vary to any
size while keeping the width constant. In this case, the terminal run of pipe is set to one
bend radius with the loop width fixed to the remaining length of element 60-70.

At this point there are two alternatives to indicating where the loop should be placed.
8. Click Draw Cube to generate a transparent cube anchored on the selected element. You
can adjust the size and location of this cube by using the mouse. Use the corner points (Pt1
or Pt2) to adjust the major direction of the loop and the available space. Use the triangle to
adjust the minor axis of the loop and the available space. Drag the cube over the decking
adjacent to element 60-70 to build a cube with a Major dimension of 17ft 11 inches in the X
direction.

9. After the dialog box is complete, Click Design to start the optimization procedure.
The progress of the design scheme displays. After the loop is designed, you are informed of
how much pipe and how many bends were required to create the loop.
10. Click Undo to restart the Loop Wizard using different loop types. You can use this
information to find the most economical implementation.
When the optimizer finishes, the new expansion loop is inserted into the selected element.

11. Run a final analysis to verify all results. There are instances where the optimizer reports an
error. Examples of such situations are: (a) requesting a loop insertion in an element that is
not long enough, or (b) setting an impossible target maximum.
Selecting the special loop type enables CAESAR II to select the best loop to reach the
indicated target. This loop type is indicated on the dialog box by a lightning bolt. The best
characteristic of each loop is based on the relative cost of bends to straight pipe. When you
select the lightning bolt loop type, the Bend Cost Factor box activates. The default value of
100 indicates that a bend costs 100 times as much as the equivalent length of straight pipe.
Adjust this value as necessary.

Loop Optimization Wizard Overview

The Loop Optimization Wizard automates the sizing of expansion loops in a piping system.
Optimization Type
Specifies the type of output value to optimize or reduce. You can use the Loop Design
Wizard to improve Stress levels or Restraint load components for any piping loop in a
model.
Load Case (for Design)

Specifies the load case for which to reduce an output value. Adding a loop may well solve a
problem in a displacement-driven load case (Operating or Expansion) but not in a
force-driven load case (Sustained or Occasional).
After you select the Load Case value, the software displays Stress or Restraint Load
output values for review and selection.
Target Stress
Specifies the target level to which you would like to reduce the output value. Typing a stress
value (or a Load, in conjunction with a Load Component type) acts as a filter, showing only
elements which have stress values exceeding that level. This target value also becomes the
stress or load for which the selected target (Maximum System Stress, Restraint Load
Component, or Node) is optimized.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.
Max. Stress
Optimizes the maximum stress level in the system (as opposed to a stress level at a single
node) to the value in the Target Data box.
At Node
Specifies either the node at which the stress level is to be optimized (and the element upon
which that node is located) or the node at which a restraint load component is to be
optimized (along with the Load Component Type). Double-click one of the entries in the
Element/Node/Stress list or a Load Component in the Restraint Load to automatically fill
in these entries.

On Element
For Stress Optimization:
Specifies the element on which the node for which the stress level is to be optimized is
located. Double-click one of the entries in the Element/Node/Stress list to automatically fill
in this entry.
For Restraint Load Optimization:
Specifies the restraint load component which is to be optimized. Double-click one of the
Load Component entries in the Restraint Load list to automatically fill in this entry.
Element/Node/Stress/Restraint Load Component

Displays the items which you can double-click to automatically fill in the entries designating
the item (either nodal stress or restraint load component) for which the results should be
optimized.
Create Loop on Element

Specifies the element which is replaced by the loop. You can select the element from the list
or from the model. The Loop Optimization Wizard can only be used to substitute loops in
place of single elements.
Loop Type
Specifies the general configuration of the loop.
Type #1 - places the loop at the From end of the original element in the
plane of the Major Direction.
Type #2 - Places a 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop at the From
end of the original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the
plane of the Minor Direction.
Type #3 - Places the loop in the middle of the original element in the plane
of the Major Direction.
Type #4 - Places 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop in the middle of
the original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane
of the Minor Direction.

Type #5 - Places the loop at the To end of the original element, in the plane
of the Major Direction.
Type #6 - Places 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop at the To end of
the original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane
of the Minor Direction.
Type # 7 - Builds a loop of the same size as the original element.
Type # 8 - Builds a 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop of the same size
as the original element, first in the Major Direction and then in the Minor
Direction.
Type #9 - Causes CAESAR II to try all eight loop types and find the most
economically efficient solution based on total pipe length and number of bends.

Bend Cost Factor

Specifies the relative cost of a bend relative to straight pipe. This value is used when
CAESAR II is asked to select the most economic loop design. For example, if a bend
(including hardware, fabrication, and other costs) costs 100 times as much as the same
length of straight pipe, then the appropriate value would be 100.0.
Width to Height Ratio

Specifies the loop height to width ratio that should be maintained when building the loop.
Available options are 2.0, 1.0, 0.5, and none.
Select none if the segments of the selected loop configurations still coincide with the original
element run. For example, segment #4 of Loop Type #1, segment #6 of Loop Type #2,
segments #1 and #5 of Loop Type #3, segments #1 and #7 of Loop Type #4, or segment #1
of Loop Types #5 and #6 have a length equal to exactly the length of a long radius bend.
This entry does not apply in the event that Loop Types #7 or #8 were selected. In this case,
the height to width ratio is not used. The height varies as necessary and the width is held
constant to the length necessary to make up the original element length. This last option is
often preferable in areas where there is limited room for wide loops.

Draw Cube
Graphically creates the anticipated area where the loop is installed. This cube may then be
resized or moved to reflect the preferred area for the loop. The Loop Optimization Wizard
tries to design a loop that fits in the allocated space.
Major Direction
Specifies the direction and distance of the primary direction of the loop.
Minor Direction
Specifies direction and distance of the secondary direction of a 2-D loop.
Major Direction Available Space

Specifies the maximum available space for the loop in the major direction.
Minor Direction Available Space

Specifies the maximum available space for the loop in the minor direction.
Design (Button)
Begins the loop optimization process. If an appropriate loop cannot be designed, you must
change some of the parameters and try again.
Line Numbers
Displays the Line Numbers dialog box.
Line Numbers Dialog Box

Controls options for line numbers. You can set visibility options for line numbers from the 3D
model on the piping input and the Graphical Output in the Static Output Processor.
Press SHIFT + click to select multiple line numbers.
Create from Selection

Creates line numbers from the selected elements. You can only create line numbers for
selected elements from the piping input 3D model.
Remove Line Number

Deletes line numbers from the selected elements. You can only remove line numbers for
selected elements from the piping input 3D model.

You can also right-click select Remove Line Number (in Piping Input only).
Reset Settings
Returns visibility settings to their default settings. Use the drop down to specify to Reset
Visibility, Reset Color, or All settings.
You can also right-click on a line and select one of the reset options.
<type here to search>
Limits the elements that display in the Line Numbers dialog box to those line numbers and
node numbers that match the text in this field. Clear this field to display all elements. You
can search on a line number name or a node number.
Show/Hide
Turns the display of line numbers for elements on or off.
Visibility
Specifies the opacity of elements. 100% indicates that the element is opaque. 0% indicates
that the element is completely translucent, or invisible.
Color
Displays the Color dialog box from which you can specify a color for the element.
Name
Specifies the name of the element.
See Also
Line Number (on page 228)
Environment Menu
Performs actions associated with miscellaneous items.
Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes

Displays the Node Selection dialog box. Access this function from the Classic Piping Input
dialog box by clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes or Intersection
SIF scratchpad on the Input Tools toolbar.
Node Selection Dialog Box

Controls options for selecting the node.
Enter intersection Node Number to be reviewed - Specifies the number of the node
where you want to evaluate the stress intensification factors.
OK - Displays the Review Intersection SIF's dialog box.
Review Intersection SIFs Dialog Box

Controls options for reviewing intersection SIFs.

The boxes that display in this dialog box depend upon the piping code you select for the
job. The following list details all possible boxes that the software can display in this dialog box.
The first section shows the most common dialog boxes, but other code-specific inputs below
that.
Node
appropriate SIFs.
SIFs.
bend curvature.
Type
Specifies the type of tee or joint.
For non-FRP piping codes, there are six types of tees and ten types of joints. These
elements correspond to 1 to 6 and 7 to 16 in the Input Items Optionally Effecting SIF
Calculations (see "Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations (Except for ISO
14692)*" on page 132) table.
For BS 7159 and UKOOA, there are two types of tees: Moulded and Fabricated.
Moulded tee corresponds to either the Welding (3) or Extruded (6) welding tee
Type. Fabricated tee corresponds to a tee Type of Reinforced (1).

For IGE/TD/12, there are 11 types of tees and joints. For specialized diagrams of
tee type with this code, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page 150).
For ISO 14692, there are three types of tee and joints: Tee (1), Qualified Tee (3),
and Joint (2). Select 1 - Tee for the software to use the method specified in the ISO
14692 code for non-qualified tees. Select 2 - Joint for CAESAR II to use the
calculations specified in the code for joints and fittings. Select 3 - Qualified Tee for
the software to use the code-specified calculation for qualified service stress for
tees (including the pressure stress multiplier, m pst).
ASME NC and ND piping codes do not include equations for SIFs with a tee Type
of Sweepolet (4), Weldolet (5), or Extruded (6). When you specify one of these tee
types, CAESAR II uses B31.1 equations.
Pad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the reinforcing pad for reinforced fabricated or full encirclement
tees (intersection type #1 and #17, respectively). The pad thickness is only valid for these
intersection types. If the thickness of a type #1 or type #17 intersection is left blank or the
value entered is zero, the software uses the SIFs for an unreinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the pad thickness is limited to 1.5 times the
nominal thickness of the header. This factor does not apply in BS 806 or Z184, and is 2.5 in
the Swedish piping code.
Ftg Ro
Specifies the fitting outside radius for branch connections. This option is used for reduced
branch connections in the ASME and B31.1 piping codes, Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets,
and for WRC 329 intersection SIF calculations. Configuration options exist to invoke the
WRC 329 calculations and to limit the application of the reduced branch connection rules to
unreinforced fabricated tees, sweepolets, weldolets, and extruded welding tees. If omitted,
Ftg Ro defaults to the outside radius of the branch pipe.
150).
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
150).
150).


150).
Weldoflange
150).
Crotch R
Specifies the crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee, intersection type 6.
This is also the intersection weld crotch radius for WRC329 calculations. Specifying this
value can result in a 50% reduction in the stress intensification at the WRC 329 intersection.
If you attempt to reduce the stress riser at a fabricated intersection by guaranteeing that
there is a smooth transition radius from the header to the branch pipe, then you may reduce
the resulting stress intensification by a factor of 2.0.
Weld ID
IGE/TD/12
Weld(d)
Specifies the average circumferential weld mismatch measured at the inside diameter of the
pipe. This value is used for Butt Welds and Tapered transitions. This is the average; not the
maximum mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are
satisfied for your particular code.
Fillet
Specifies the fillet leg length. This option is used only in conjunction with a socket weld
component. This value is the length of the shorter leg for an unequal leg fillet weld. If a fillet
leg is given, both socket weld types result in the same SIF. See appendix D of the B31
piping codes for further clarification.
Header OD
Specifies the actual outside diameter of the header matching pipe.
Header Thk
Specifies the actual wall thickness of the header matching pipe.

Branch OD
Specifies the actual outside diameter of the matching pipe.
Branch Thk
Specifies the actual wall thickness of the matching pipe.
Header SIF(i)
Displays the SIF in-plane for the header.
Header SIF(o)
Displays the SIF out-of-plane for the header.
Branch SIF(i)
Displays the SIF in-plane for the branch.
Branch SIF(o)
Displays the SIF out-of-plane for the branch.
Flexibility Characteristic
Displays the flexibility characteristic. For more information on how wall thickness is used in
the flexibility characteristic (h) equation, see Wall Thickness of Bend (on page 793).
Branch Section Modulus
Displays the branch section modulus.
Recalculate
Displays the SIFs after you enter a different set of data. If you change the input data,
CAESAR II allows you to transfer the data back to a CAESAR II model.
Other Code-Specific Inputs

The following inputs appear only when you select certain piping codes.
Do/r3
page 150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
page 150).
Weldoflange
150).

T/Th/Tb
150).
Weldolet
page 150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
150).
Weldoflange
page 150).
Te/Tb
150).
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
150).
150).
150).
Weldoflange
150).
rp/do
Fabricated Tee

150).
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
150).
150).
Weldoflange
150).
r2/rc
Fabricated Tee
150).
150).
Sweepolet
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
150).
150).
Weldoflange
150).

r1/Tc/Lh
Fabricated Tee
150).
Specifies the Tc value. For more information on Tc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Sweepolet
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lh value. For more information on Lh, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
150).
Weldoflange
150).
L1/Lb
Fabricated Tee
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lb value. For more information on Lb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
150).
Weldoflange
150).

Ferric Material for Note 3673.2b-1.3

Indicates that the material for this tee is ferrous, which enables the Y value to be computed
on the highest temperature value specified. This option is available for when you select
ASME NC and ASME ND in the Piping Code ID list.
Review SIFs at Bend Nodes

Displays the Node Selection dialog box. Access this function from the Classic Piping Input
dialog box by clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Bend Nodes or Bend SIF
scratchpad on the Input Tools toolbar.
Node Selection Dialog Box

Controls options for selecting the node.
Enter bend Node Number to be reviewed - Specifies the node number where you want to
evaluate the stress intensification factors.
OK - Displays the Review Bend SIF's dialog box.
Review Bend SIFs Dialog Box

Controls options for reviewing bend SIFs.
Node Displays the node number.
Bend Radius Displays the bend radius. CAESAR II assumes a long radius by default.
You can override this value. Alternatively, select a value from the list.
Long - Indicates a long radius bend. The radius is equal to 1.5 times the nominal
diameter.
Short - Indicates a short radius bend. The radius is equal to the nominal pipe
diameter.
Bend Type Specifies the bend type. For most codes, this refers to the number of attached
flanges and can be selected from the list. If there are no flanges on the bend, leave Type
blank. A bend should be considered flanged if there is any heavy or rigid body within two
diameters of the bend that significantly restricts the bends ability to ovalize.
When using the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes with Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe,
this entry refers to the material laminate type and may be 1, 2, or 3. These laminate types
are
All chopped strand mat (CSM) constructing with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and
The laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification factors
for the BS 7159 and UKOOA Codes only.

For ISO 14692, only type 3 filament-wound laminate is considered.

Bend Angle Displays the bend angle.
Fitting Thickness Specifies the thickness of the bend if that thickness is different than the
thickness of the matching pipe. If the thickness is greater than the matching pipe wall
thickness, then the inside diameter of the bend is smaller than the inside diameter of the
matching pipe. CAESAR II calculates section modulus for stress computations based on the
properties of the matching pipe as defined by the codes.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors; once as Tn,
and once when determining the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for
the flexibility characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r2)
Tn = Thickness of bend or fitting
R = Bend radius
r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe
= (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter of matching pipe
WT = Wall Thickness of matching pipe
Most codes use the actual thickness of the fitting (this entry) for Tn, and the wall thickness of
the matching pipe for the calculation of the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe (the WT
value). More specifically, the individual codes use the two wall thicknesses as follows:
Code For Tn: For Mean Radius Calculation:
B31.1 Fitting Fitting
B31.8 Ch VIII Fitting Matching Pipe
SECT III NC Fitting Matching Pipe
SECT III ND Fitting Matching Pipe
Z662 Matching Pipe Matching Pipe
NAVY 505 Fitting Fitting
B31.1 (1967) Fitting Fitting
SWEDISH Fitting Matching Pipe

BS 806 N/A N/A
STOOMWEZEN N/A N/A
RCC-M C/D Matching Matching Pipe

Pipe
CODETI Fitting Fitting
NORWEGIAN Fitting Fitting
FDBR Fitting Fitting
BS 7159 Fitting Fitting
UKOOA Fitting Fitting
IGE/TD/12 Fitting Fitting
EN-13480 Fitting Matching Pipe
GPTC/Z380 Fitting Matching Pipe
The bend fitting thickness (FTG) is always used as the pipe thickness in the stiffness matrix
calculations. However, the thickness of the matching pipe (WT) is always used in the bend
stress calculations.
Number of Miter Cuts Displays the number of cuts in the bend if it is mitered. When you
type a number, CAESAR II checks if the mitered bend input is closely or widely spaced. If
the bend is determined to be widely spaced, and the number of miter cuts is greater than
one, the bend should be broken down into n single cut widely spaced miters, where n is
the total number of cuts in the bend. The number of cuts and the radius of the bend are all
that is required to calculate the SIFs and flexibilities for the bend as defined in the B31
codes. The bend radius and the bend miter spacing are related by the following equations:
Closely Spaced Miters
R = S / (2 tan )
q = Bend Angle / (2 n) where n = number of miter cuts
Widely Spaced Miters
R = r2 (1.0 + cot q) / 2.0
r2 = (ri + ro) / 2.0
= Bend Angle / 2.0
Seam Weld Indicates that the bend is seam welded.
B31.3
If the B31.3 piping code is active, the Seam Welded check box is used to activate the
Wl box for bends. The Wl box is the weld strength reduction factor used to determine
the minimum wall thickness of the bend element.

IGE/TD/12
Used by IGE/TD/12 to calculate the stress intensification factors due to seam welded
elbow fabrication as opposed to extruded elbow fabrication. This option is only available
when IGE/TD/12 is active.
Matching Pipe OD Specifies the outside diameter of the matching pipe. This is used in
the average cross sectional radius calculation:
r2 = (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter as entered
WT = Wall Thickness of attached pipe
The B31.3 (1993) code defines r2 as the mean radius of matching pipe.
Matching Pipe Thk Specifies the match pipe wall thickness. You should not subtract any
corrosion. All SIF calculations are made ignoring corrosion. This wall thickness is used in
the mean radius (r2) calculation as defined in the piping codes.
Elastic Modulus Specifies the elastic modulus among EC, E1 to E9. This value is used
for the pressure stiffening calculations.
Pressure Specifies the pressures among PMax, P1 to P9, PHydro and none. This value
is used for the pressure stiffening calculations.
Bend In-Plane SIF Displays the SIF under in-plane bending.
Bend Out-of-Plane SIF Displays the SIF under out-of-plane bending.
In-Plane Flexibility Factor Displays the flexibility factor under in-plane bending.
Out-of-Plane Flexibility Factor Displays the flexibility factor under out-of-plane bending.
Flexibility Characteristic Displays the pipe factor.
Recalculate - Displays the SIFs after you enter a different set of data. If you change the
input data, CAESAR II allows you to transfer the data back to a CAESAR II model.

Special Execution Parameters

Displays the Special Execution Parameters dialog box. Click Environment > Special
Execution Parameters. These parameters remain set for that particular job.
Print Forces on Rigids and Expansion Joints

Indicates whether forces are printed on rigid elements and expansion joints. Forces and
moments are not normally printed for these elements because the forces that act on these
elements can usually be read directly from the forces that act on the adjacent pipe elements.
Select this option to cause forces and moments to be calculated and printed for all rigid
elements and expansion joints in the system.

Print Alphas and Pipe Properties

Indicates whether the software prints alphas and pipe properties. CAESAR II prints the
thermal expansion coefficients along with the pipe, insulation, fluid, and refractory weights in
the error checker. This report can be very useful during error checking to help identify
possible problems in the temperature or weight input specifications. Rigid elements and
expansion joints are treated the same as straight pipe. Rigid weights and insulation cladding
factors are not reflected in this table.
Activate Bourdon Effects

Specifies the Bourdon effects option to use. Choose the option from the drop list to activate
the Bourdon pressure effect. The Bourdon pressure effect causes straight pipes to elongate,
or displace along their axes, and causes curved pipes or bends to elongate along the line
that connects the bends near and far nodes. If the Bourdon effect is not activated, there are
no global displacements due to pressure. The Bourdon effect is always considered when
plastic pipe is used, regardless of the setting of the Activate Bourdon Effects option.
By default, CAESAR II does not include the Bourdon effect in the analysis of steel piping
systems. That is, there are no displacements of the system due to pressure.
As an option, you can include pressure displacement effects. These effects can be
appreciable in long runs of pipe or in high pressure, large diameter bends adjacent to
sensitive equipment.
Bourdon effects are almost always important in fiberglass reinforced plastic piping systems.
For this reason the Bourdon (Translational) is automatically turned on for all FRP pipe runs
and bends.
Two Bourdon options are available:
Use the Translation only option when the elbows in the system are forged or
welded fittings and can reasonably be assumed to have a circular cross section.
Use the Translational & Rotational option when the bends in the system are
fabricated by the hot or cold bending of straight pipe. In these cases the slight
residual ovalization of the bend cross section, after bending, causes the bend to try
to straighten out when pressurized. Fixed end moments are associated with this
opening. These fixed end moments do not exist when the original shape of the bend
cross-section is circular.

Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts

Specifies how branch error and coordinate prompts display. You are prompted for two
pieces of information:
The loop closure tolerance.
The global coordinates of the first point of the piping system and each following
piece of the piping system that is not connected to the first.
This data is needed the first time CAESAR II prepares a global geometry calculation. This
calculation is made on three different occasions:
Before preprocessor plots are generated.
Before global coordinate reports are built.
Before error checking is performed.
Alternatively, you can select Edit > Global and specify the global coordinates to avoid any
prompting.
There are several major uses for this flag:
Set the loop closure tolerance.
Define the elevation of the piping system for wind/wave load calculations.
Give the proper east-west or north-south coordinates for dimension checks.
Move parts of the system around in the plotted output for visual checking.
Whenever you create a physical loop in the piping system, there are at least two different sets of
dimensions between the same points. If the two dimensions are not within a certain tolerance of
each other, a fatal error occurs. You can set this tolerance interactively or in the configuration
file. Select Both for the Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts option to cause CAESAR II to
interactively prompt for this tolerance.
Thermal Bowing Delta Temperature

Specifies the temperature differential which exists between the top of the pipe and the
bottom of the pipe. This differential is used to compute an elemental load. It is added to
each temperature case for horizontal pipes.
This entry is computed from the equation:
dT = Ttop - Tbottom
For example, consider a horizontal pipe where the temperature on the top is 20 degrees
hotter than the temperature on the bottom. The proper value to type in this box is 20, not
-20.

Liberal Stress Allowable

Indicates whether or not to use liberal stress allowable. Conservative formulation of the
allowable expansion stress range for many codes in CAESAR II is calculated from:
f ( 1.25 Sc + .25 Sh )
When select this option, the difference between Sh and Sl, provided Sh > Sl, is added to the
term inside the parenthesis. That is:
SA(Liberal) = f[ 1.25 Sc + .25 Sh + ( Sh - Sl) ]
The liberal expression is only used when there is at least one sustained stress case in the
load set. If there is more than one sustained stress case in a single problem, then the
largest of Sl, considering all of the sustained cases, for any single element end is chosen to
subtract from Sh. Because the sustained stress varies from one pipe to another, the
allowable expansion stress also varies.
By default, CAESAR II uses the liberal stress allowable setting in the configuration file in
its computation of the expansion stress allowable. New models are created using this
configuration setting. If you do not want to use this default setting for calculating the
expansion, clear this check box.
Uniform Load in G's

Specifies whether to use a magnifier of gravitational loading for the uniform load. Uniform
load can be defined either in terms of force per unit length or in terms of a magnifier of
gravitational loading. Uniform load in G's is used most often for static earthquake loadings.
Earthquake loads are occasional loadings and as such are not directly addressed
by the CAESAR II recommended load case logic. You must form your own
combination cases at the output processor level that represent the algebraic sum of
the stresses due to sustained and occasional loads. For more information, see
Occasional Load Factor (on page 94).
When you select this option, the in Gs radio button is activated on the first Uniform
Load auxiliary dialog box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. You can override
this option by selecting the in F/L option.

Ambient Temperature
Specifies the actual ambient temperature. The default ambient temperature for all elements
in the system is 70F/21C. If this does not accurately represent the installed, or zero
expansion strain state, then type the actual value in this box. The ambient temperature is
used in conjunction with the specified hot temperature and the interpolated expansion
coefficient to calculate the thermal expansion per inch of pipe length experienced by the
element when going from the ambient temperature to the hot temperature.
A default ambient temperature can be defined in the configuration file. For more information,
see New Job Ambient Temperature (on page 54). The software uses this configuration file
value to set the ambient temperature when you create a new model.
FRP Coef. of Thermal Expansion (x 1,000,000 )

Specifies the thermal expansion coefficient. The default thermal expansion coefficient for
fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe is 12.0E-6 in./in./deg.F. If you have a more suitable value
for the particular composite, type that value in this box. For example, if the improved value
was: 8.5E-6 in./in./deg. F., then type 8.5 in this box. The exponent (E-6) is implied. This
expansion coefficient is used in conjunction with the temperatures on the Classic Piping
Input dialog box for each plastic pipe element to calculate the thermal expansion for the
element.
This method does not provide for any variation in the thermal expansion coefficient as a
function of temperature. This could prove limiting should there be parts of the system at
different non-ambient temperatures. In this case, you can always calculate the thermal
expansion at temperature in inches per inch and input this value directly into the
Temperature box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
For new models, the default value is obtained from the configuration file.
FRP Ratio of Shear Modulus/Emod Axial

Specifies the ratio of the shear modulus to the modulus of elasticity in the axial direction of
the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe. For example, if the material modulus-of-elasticity
(axial) is 3.2E6 psi, and the shear modulus is 8.0E5 psi, type 0.25 as the ratio of these two.
For new models, the default value is obtained from the configuration file.

FRP Laminate Type

Specifies the default laminate type as defined in the BS 7159 code for the fiberglass
reinforced plastic pipe. Valid laminate types are:
CSM and Woven Roving
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external
surface tissue reinforced layer.
CSM and Multi-filament
Chopped strand mat and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external surface
tissue reinforced layer.
CSM
All chopped strand mat construction with internal and external surface tissue reinforced
layer.
The software uses this entry to calculate the flexibility and stress intensity factors of bends;
therefore, this default entry may be overridden using the Type field on the bend auxiliary
dialog boxes.
Z-Axis Vertical
Indicates that the Z axis is vertical. Traditionally CAESAR II has used a coordinate system
where the Y-axis coincides with the vertical axis. In one alternative coordinate system, the
Z-axis represents the vertical axis (with the X axis chosen arbitrarily, and the Y-axis being
defined according to the right hand rule. CAESAR II now gives you the ability to model using
either coordinate system. You can also switch between the systems in most cases.
You can specify that CAESAR II start with the Z axis vertical. For more information, see
Z-Axis Vertical (see "New Job Z-Axis Vertical" on page 70).
A new piping model determines its axis orientation based on the setting in the
Configure/Setup module. An existing piping model uses the same axis orientation under
which it was last saved. You can change the axis orientation from Y-Axis to Z-Axis vertical
by clicking the check box on the Environment-Special Execution Parameters dialog box.
Clicking this check box causes the model to immediately convert to match the new axis
orientation. That is, Y-values become Z-values or the reverse. There is no change in the
model; only the representation changes.
This allows any piping input file to be immediately translated from one coordinate system
into the other.
When including other piping files in a model, the axis orientation of the included files need
not match that of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
When including structural files in a piping model, the axis orientation of the include files need
not match that of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
The axis orientation on the Static Load Case Builder (such as wind and wave loads), the
Static Output Processor, The Dynamic Input Module, and the Dynamic Output Processor is
dictated by the orientation of the model input file.

Bandwidth Optimizer Options

Orders the set of equations that represent the piping system for both static and dynamic
analyses. The optimizer may be run with a variety of different switch settings. The default
settings were chosen for their combination of ordering efficiency and speed. These settings
should suffice for the majority of piping systems analyzed. For systems having greater than
100 nodes, or that are highly interconnected, the following optimum parameters should be
used.
Optimizer Method = Both
Next Node Selection = Decreasing
Final Ordering = Reversed
Collins Ordering = Band
Degree Determination = Connections
User Control = None
If the User Control is set to Allow User Re-looping, CAESAR II lets you interactively try as
many different combinations of switch settings as needed. When the most efficient ordering
is obtained, you can continue on with the analysis. This interactive prompting for
optimization parameters is done in the analysis level processing.
Include Piping Input Files

Includes other piping models in the current piping model. Piping models added may have a
node offset applied and can optionally be rotated about the Y-axis before being added.
Include Piping Files Dialog Box

File Name - Displays the file to include. Click Browse to browse for the file name. The file need
not reside in the current data directory.
Read Now - Specifies whether or not the file is read immediately. Select Y if the file is to be read
immediately and stored as part of the current input. The file read may be edited as part of the
current job. Select N, if the file is to be read for plotting and fully processed only during error
checking. The file read may not be edited as part of the current job.
RotY - Specifies the angle about the Y axis to rotate the model before including it in the current
job. The rotation applies regardless of the Read Now setting.
Restraints, uniform loads, and concentrated forces are not rotated. Additionally, the
rotation of the model can be accomplished from the List utility For more information, see Rotate
(on page 334).
Inc - Specifies the increment to be added to all of the nodes in the model before including it in
the current job. The node increment applies regardless of the Read Now setting.

Including Structural Input Files

Includes existing structural model into the current job. The structural model must have been
built and successfully error checked in the structural steel preprocessor accessed from the
CAESAR II menu. For more information, see Structural Steel Modeler (on page 397).
After a structural model has been built, you can include it into any piping input. You can include
the names of up to 20 different structural models. After this is done, you can plot and analyze
the structural model with the piping model. The structural models need not reside in the current
folder.
Piping systems are usually tied to structural steel models by the use of restraints with
connecting nodes. Make absolutely sure there are no node number conflicts between structure
and pipe models. After you define a restraint with a connecting node between the pipe and
structure, CAESAR II knows where to put the structure in the resulting preprocessor plot. If no
connection between the pipe and the structure is given, the structure is plotted starting from the
origin of the piping system. In this case, the resulting plot may not meet your expectations.
Advanced PCF Import (APCF)

The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) option provides an interactive, customizable way of
importing Piping Component Files (PCFs) to the CAESAR II piping environment.
Provides more control and flexibility over element sequencing and node numbering
Provides the capability to build and verify the model in an incremental way
Provides the capability to selectively update the CAESAR II model
An interactive interface is built directly into the CAESAR II input environment that:
Does everything that the PCF batch process does (See PCF/Intergraph Smart 3D PCF doc
in External Interfaces section)
Builds the piping input model on a line-by-line basis if needed
Provides the ability to define and control node numbering
Uses the Block Operations modeling tools to ease modeling changes.
You can perform the APCF function to create a new model or add to any existing job model. The
CAESAR II input model constructed from the PCFs assumes the Units System of the current
job, plus automatically attach/intersect the piping generated from the PCF to the existing piping,
if appropriate.
The PCF file format is a standard drawing exchange format developed by Alias Ltd. A PCF is a
flat text file containing detailed information about the piping system components. The
information is extracted from a CAD system. Details on the format of the PCF and its capabilities
can be obtained from Alias.
Converting the PCF

1. Before you begin the conversion, determine:
Which files will be converted
How they should be combined

How they should be numbered on the first conversion process.

2. Click Environment > Advanced PCF Import (APCF) to begin the conversion of a PCF(s)
to a CAESAR II Piping Input file.
The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box displays.
3. Click Choose Files.

4. Select the PCF(s) to convert.
A PCF has a file extension of .pcf.

PCFs may be selected all at once or each one may be added to the conversion list just prior
to being converted. Only those files with the check box selected are processed.
Files can be arranged in the order you want to process them by dragging-and-dropping the
file names in the conversion list.
In the example, the elements of the header, which includes files TPA-551-0012, 551-00513,
521-90100_BL, 521-90100, and 521-90102, are processed first.
Vents off of that header are processed next (in the example, 521-12101, 521-12113,
521-12112, 521-12111, 521-12138, 521-12137, 521-10103, 521-10104, 521-90461).
Finally, the separate detached section files (551-0012, 551-0041) are processed last.
5. Set the conversion options listed in the lower left-hand pane.
Condense Options
Miscellaneous Options
CAESAR II Element Properties

The options can be set identically for all conversion passes, or they can be changed for
each pass. The example uses Piping Materials based on Pipe Spec and also set a Diameter
Limit (exclude pipes below 3" nominal) as well as condense rigids, tees, and bends.
In this example, clear the check boxes for all files except those comprising the header. This
converts the header files. To process them together, define a Start Node of 0 for files 2
through 5 ("0" signifies "carry on numbering with the next available number"). Start
numbering the system with node 1000 and continue with an increment of 10.
This means that all of the elements from all of the files are combined, sorted, ordered,
numbered, and so forth. For example, a header from the first five files is processed before
adding branches from the first file as though they came from a single large PCF. This is
assured by processing a group of files together during the same process, and defining the
Start Node for files after the first in the group as "0". Processing files individually or entering
a Start Node (or changing the Node Increment) for specific files in the group being
processed causes those files to be processed individually.
6. Begin the conversion by clicking the Begin Processing button.
This creates the first portion of the CAESAR II piping input model.
At this point, all CAESAR II functions (3D graphics pane, Classic Input Piping dialog box,
Elements dialog box) are available for examining the resultant piping input model.
Remember that you can use the Undo button.
7. In the example, you can select the vent lines to be processed separately, each with their
own numbering system.
8. In the example, check each of the next 9 file names, plus define the Start Node for each.

This causes each individual vent line to be fully processed before proceeding to the next.
Alternatively these files could be processed individually simply by running them one at a
time.
The vents are processed as requested.

Undo is available.

9. Process the second detached section, with both files processed together, and the Start
Node set at node at 10000.

After the conversion processing completes, the CAESAR II piping input model looks like this
in the example.
At this point, the entries for Delta Coordinates, Temperatures, Pressures, and so forth may
contain values calculated to several decimal places due to repetitive unit conversions and
other calculations during the conversion process. For example, see the DX = -5390.7523
mm and the Temp 1 = 250.0214C.
These entries can be automatically rounded to the nearest integer by closing the APCF
Import dialog box using the "X" in the right top corner.
We recommend that this round-off process not be done until all PCFs have been
imported. This is because connectivity is determined based upon sharing global
coordinates. If element delta coordinates get rounded off, then nodal global coordinates may
get changed enough that they fall outside of the connection tolerances.

Warnings in Log.RTF file

During the conversion process, Status Messages display in the Message Area in the lower right
of the dialog box.
These messages are also written to a LOG file with the name XXXX.LOG.RTF, where XXXX
represents the name (less the extension) of the Combined CAESAR II file (in the case where
many PCFs are being combined into a single CAESAR II model) or the first CAESAR II file in
the list (where one or more PCFs are being combined into individual CAESAR II models).
1. Click Save Warnings to save the warnings to a different file.
Topics
PCF Interface Custom Attributes..................................................313
How to Use the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) ............................328
PCF Interface Custom Attributes

PCFs contain custom attributes in the form of component-attribute<n>. Intergraph Smart 3D can
generate PCFs with ISO_STRESS PCF configuration. This configuration assures that a number
of various data fields are passed in specific PCF data fields.
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 = Design pressure
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2 = Maximum temperature
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 = Material name
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE4 = Wall thickness (reducing thickness in the case of reducing
components)
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE5 = Insulation thickness
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE6 = Insulation density
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE7 = Corrosion allowance
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE8 = Component weight
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE9 = Fluid density
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10 = Hydro test pressure
The units associated with the values of these attributes are defined by including a descriptive
unit label after the value. For example, the pressure attribute, COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1, can
be specified as COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 15.3 barg. If the unit label chosen (barg) is not
one of the labels recognized by CAESAR II as defined through Tools > Create/Review Units
on the CAESAR II Main menu, then you must include that label in the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT
file in the CAESAR II System folder.
The only PCF SUPPORT attribute that is not ignored is the SUPPORT-DIRECTION
attribute. It must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH.
One note on the Material Number setting is that the selected material is applied to a piping
element as the default only if the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 for that element is not
specified or recognized.

You can achieve the best results by preparing customized mapping files before beginning the
conversion process.
You may use default mapping files if the values fit our model. There are a number of mapping
files that define various values. Locate these files in the CAESAR II System folder.
PCF Unit Mapping

The PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file maps the PCF Units name to the conversion factor used to
convert it to the CAESAR II internal units (English).
This file defines three columns:
CAESAR II Unit Displays the internal unit used by the software
PCF Unit Displays the user-supplied unit label
Conversion from CAESAR II -> PCF Displays the conversion factor used to convert the
user-supplied unit to a CAESAR II internal unit
Comments can be added at the end of each line separated from the last column value by
spaces and preceded by the "*" character.
All PCF component attributes can be specified inside the PCF with their associated units. Any
unit specified by the PCF component attributes which is not a standard internal CAESAR II unit
as defined by the Tools > Create/Review Units dialog box on the CAESAR II Main menu needs
to be mapped inside the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file.
CAESAR II divides the user-supplied value by this constant to calculate the value for the
attribute that is displayed by the software according to the units specified in the configuration
options (except that temperature from C to F will also add the 32 ).
To Modify the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT File

Locate this file in the CAESAR II System folder.
This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to
make changes to fit your model.
1. Open the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.

An example of the CAESAR II default file is shown below.
2. Modify any of the units definitions or add another unit definition as needed.
3. Save, and close the file.
PCF Material Mapping

The PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file maps PCF material names to a corresponding CAESAR II
material number. Note that the first line is currently reserved to the CAESAR II version number.
The match in this file must be an exact match. If no match is found, then the software searches
the CAESAR II material database to find the "best match" (where the "best match" tries to do an
intelligent match, adjusting for dashes, spaces, "GR", "SA" versus "A", and so forth) for the
material name.
PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 is used by the software to set the material attribute for each
component. If the COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 value is not defined or recognized, the software
applies the default material as specified by the Material Number value in the dialog box.
Any material specified by the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 which is not a standard
CAESAR II material as defined in the Tools > Materials dialog under the Material > Edit
menu must be mapped inside the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file.
To Modify the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT File

This file is located in the CAESAR II System folder.

1. Open the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad.
The CAESAR II default file looks like this.
2. Modify any of the materials definitions.

3. Save and close the file.
PCF Restraint Mapping

The PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II restraint types corresponding to PCF
support/restraint names.
The PCF SUPPORT attribute is used by CAESAR II to apply supports at the specified
coordinates. Only the SUPPORT-DIRECTION identifier is interpreted by the software if no
match is found for a particular support NAME in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file. The
SUPPORT-DIRECTION identifier must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or
SOUTH.
In order to fine-tune the support configuration placed on the imported model by CAESAR II for a
given PCF SUPPORT component, the PCF support NAME identifier value needs to be mapped
in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.

The example below shows a typical PCF SUPPORT component, highlighting the support NAME
value which should be used to define CAESAR II support mapping.
To Modify the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT File

Locate the file in the CAESAR II system folder.
This file defines the CAESAR II function corresponding to PCF support/restraint names.
1. Open the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Modify any of the restraints definitions.
In the example, the Support type VG100 corresponds functionally to two CAESAR II supports:
+Vertical support (weight support)
Guide, each with friction coefficients equal to 0.3
This file supports a wide range of support functions, plus the key words MU= (for friction) and
GAP= (to define gaps in the restraint).

Syntax for each support type is:

<Support Name> <N->
<Restraint Function> <MU=> <GAP=>
<Support Name> - CAESAR II considers a matching as any PCF support/restraint name that
contains this <Support Name> (not an exact match). Best results are achieved if the <Support
Names> are listed in order of longest names to shortest names. Otherwise VG1" might register
as a match before VG100 is processed.
<N> - Followed by N lines of: This means how many CAESAR II restraints need to get placed
on the corresponding Restraint auxiliary screen. N should be limited to 4 or less.
<Restraint Function> - This is defined in terms of CAESAR II function (GUI, LIM, VHGR, and
so forth.), Global Axes (VERT, NS, EW, and so forth), or Local Axes (A, B, C, and so forth):
ANC, GUI, LIM, VHGR, CHGR These create a CAESAR II Anchor, Guide, Axial Restraint,
Variable Hanger, or Constant Hanger, respectively. The last two create to-be-designed
hangers, which may end up as either variable or constant hangers.
VERT, EW, NS These create translational restraints corresponding to the compass points
of the global axes (Y, X, Z respectively for the Y-up setting, and Z, X, Y respectively for the
Z-up setting). See the figure below. One-way restraints may be created by prefixing with "+"
or "-".

A, B, C These create translational restraints corresponding to the local axes of the

support/pipe installation. The A corresponds to the centerline of the pipe, B corresponds to
the "direction" attributed to the support, and C corresponds to the cross-product of the A and
B axes. As with the global restraints, one-way restraints may be created by prefixing with +
or -. See the figure below.
<MU=> Optional keyword followed by a value for adding a friction coefficient to the restraint (not
valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR).
<GAP=> Optional keyword followed by a value and set of units for adding a gap to the restraint
(not valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR).
The software also processes equipment nozzles designated by the
END-CONNECTION-EQUIPMENT keyword as imposed thermal displacements in all degrees of
freedom, all with values of 0.0. This creates an initial behavior of an anchor, but allows you to
easily impose actual thermal displacements when known.
Examples
The examples below illustrate typical restraint configurations, along with suggested mapping
entries.

Variable Spring Hanger
These represent variable spring hangers, and are mapped onto a single CAESAR II support (=
VHGR). This is interpreted as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.
Constant Effort Spring Hanger

This represents a constant effort spring hanger, and thus is mapped onto a single CAESAR II
support (= CHGR). This is treated as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.

Note that it is identical to the VHGR shown in the figure above.
These hanger rod assemblies only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward
movement. In CAESAR II, they are typically modeled as +Y (or +Z, depending on how the
vertical axis is set).

These sliding supports only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward movement. They
are represented as a single +VERT support. However, because they slide against a base, most
stress analysts prefer to add a friction coefficient (MU=x.xx).
YRIGID 1
VERT MU=0.3
or
YRIGID 1
B MU=0.3
These restraints resist load/movement in both directions (so the "+" of the previous two supports
is eliminated). If the restraint is always installed vertically, then use the first definition (VERT). If
the restraint is installed in any direction (for example, vertically or horizontally), use the second
definition B, indicating that it acts along the installed support direction. This assumes that the
installed direction of the restraint is always defined as the direction from the main steel towards
the pipe. Because sliding is involved, a friction coefficient is included as well.
UGUIDE 1
GUI MU=0.3
or

UGUIDE 1
C MU=0.3
If this restraint is always installed vertically on horizontal lines (as shown in the figure above),
then the support function can always be modeled as a Guide (with sliding friction). If the restraint
may be installed in any direction at all (with restraint direction corresponding to the direction of
the attachment point toward the pipe), then use the second definition (C) as it represents the
direction lateral to the pipe and the restraint.
TEESUPPORT 2
+VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
+VERTical
GUIde
Because sliding is involved in both functions, friction coefficients are provided for both.
VERTLATERAL 2
VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
or
VERTLATERAL 2
B MU=0.3
C MU=0.3

up/down restraint
side-to-side restraint
If it is always installed vertically, then it is defined as a VERTical and a GUIde. If it is possible
that the restraint may be rotated about the pipe to be installed in any direction, then use the
second definition, which represents restraint along the direction of the support as well as lateral
to the support and pipe.
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
LIM MU=0.3
or
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
A MU=0.3
+VERT support
An axial restraint. The axial restraint can be defined equally as LIM or A (as A corresponds
to restraint along the direction of the pipe centerline).
SWAYSTRUT 1
B

These represent sway struts, which may be installed in any direction, and provide restraint along
the line of action of the sway strut. Assuming that the restraint direction corresponds to the
direction of the sway strut, then the best way to define these restraints is B (restraint along the
support direction).
ANCHOR 1
ANC
These restraints all restrict movement of the pipe in all six degrees-of-freedom, so they can be
defined as Anchors ("ANC").
PENETRATION 4
+C GAP=aMM
-C GAP=bMM

-VERT GAP=cMM
+VERT GAP=dMM
In the example above, the pipe (and the local A-axis) is running into the page. With B up, +C is
to the right.
Some of these can get quite complex, especially if restraints have different gaps in different
directions. It may require trial and error to determine exactly how the +/- restraint directions
correspond to the support direction passed in the PCF. In some cases, you may want to model
the restraint behavior in CAESAR II rather than in the mapping file.
PCF Stress Intensification Factor Mapping

The PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II SIF data to be applied at the intersection of
tees and olets. The file also provides support for some SIF keywords.
Stress Intensification Factors (SIF) are not assigned a separate PCF
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE or defined in any other way inside PCFs. In order to tune Stress
Intensification Factor settings of imported PCF components, CAESAR II provides the
PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT mapping file.
The file defines five columns:
SKEYS PCF components use SKEYS to indicate how their subtype is

used within the general component group.
CAESAR II SIF TYPE Should be set to the SIF type number used by CAESAR II as
shown in the CAESAR II SIF TYPE figure below.
PAD=X.X UNITS (optional) Should be set to the SIF pad thickness, including the
applicable unit (for example, PAD=10 MM)
Ii=X.XX (optional) Should be set to the in-plane SIF of the component.

This is a multiplier, and therefore unit-less (for example, Ii=1.23)
Io=X.XX (optional) Should be set to the out-plane SIF of the component.

This is a multiplier, and therefore unit-less (for example, Io=2.34)

Applying the above example values to set the TERF SKEY to the associated reinforced type
requires the following mapping entry to be specified inside the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file:
TERF 1 PAD=10 MM Ii=1.23 Io=2.34
Each PCF component defines an SKEY. For an example, see the SUPPORT component
identifier listed in the figure in PCF Restraint Mapping (on page 316) (SKEY 01HG). In this case,
these are typically four-character words indicating tee type (CROSS, OLET) and end type. The
PCF menu command matches the SKEYS to the entries in this mapping file. If an SKEY is not
found in this file, you should add it.
To Modify the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT File

Locate this file in the CAESAR II system folder.
This step is strongly recommended in order to take advantage of the capabilities of the PCF
menu command.

1. Open the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Modify any of the SIF definitions.

How to Use the Advanced PCF Import (APCF)

1. Click Environment > Advanced PCF Import (APCF) from the Piping Input menu.

The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box displays.
2. Click the Choose Files button.
A PCF must have a file extension of .pcf.

You can add one or multiple files to be converted.
Remove PCF(s) from the File Name list by pressing Delete on the keyboard.
The selected file(s) displays in the File Name portion of the dialog box.
3. Enter the Start Node and Increment value for each of the file names.
4. Change any of the Conversion Options in the lower left-hand pane as needed.
Condense Rigids (on page 331)
Condense Tees (on page 1162)
Condense Elbows (on page 332)
Use Pipe Materials Only (on page 332)
Combine PCF Files (on page 332)

Model Rotation (on page 332)

Diameter Limit (on page 333)
Material Number (on page 333)
Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness (on page 333)
5. Click the Begin Processing button to initiate the conversion process.
During the Conversion Process, Status Messages display in the Message Area in the lower
right of the PCF Interface dialog box.
These messages are also written to a LOG file with the name XXXX.LOG.RTF, where XXXX
represents the name (less the extension) of the Combined CAESAR II file. The log file is
placed in the selected CAESAR II output file folder.
6. View your new CAESAR II input model.
For example, this CAESAR II model was created from the sample file 1001-P.PCF:
Elements are ordered and nodes are numbered in a logical manner.

The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_UNITS_ MAP_TXT file.
Materials
Diameter and Wall Thickness
Corrosion Allowance and Fluid Density
Operating Conditions (Temperature and Pressures) also are translated.

The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.

Restraints
The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file.
Tees convert with the correct SIFs in this case a Welding Tee and a Weldolet.
Besides supports/restraints, boundary conditions such as equipment connections transfer (in
this example, at all three nozzle connections are set). The user can easily change the
thermal displacements.
Weights of in-line components, insulation thickness and density, all material properties, and
Allowable Stress information transfer correctly.
Line numbers are assigned according to the name of the PCF file.
In this example, the output displays the applicable CAESAR II warnings, which are informational
only.
Phantom components (PCF items marked as "CONTINUATION" or "STATUS DOTTED"
or "MATERIAL LIST EXCLUDE") are ignored during the conversion process.
Tee components are modeled using the thickness of the matching pipe.
Node Numbering preferences (start node and increment) are based on the Node
Numbering Increment set in the active CAESAR II Configuration file.
Start Node
Indicates the starting node number in the resulting CAESAR II model. By default, the entire
model is renumbered using this value as the starting point. To disable renumbering, you must
set this option and Increment (on page 331) to zero.
Increment
Defines the value used as a node number increment. This value is used during the renumbering
of the model. To disable renumbering, you must set this option and Start Node (on page 331) to
zero.
Condense Rigids
Instructs the software to combine rigids that connect to each other into a single element.
This indicates whether these items should be condensed/merged into adjacent elements. For
example, a valve with adjacent gaskets and flanges would be combined into a single rigid
element.
If activated, then elements are condensed/merged unless there is a valid reason not to (change
of cross section, change of operating conditions, restraint at the location, and so forth).
The default value is TRUE.

Condense Elbows
Controls whether the software treats elbows as two designated elements. When set to TRUE,
this directive instructs the software NOT to treat elbows as two designated elements. Rather, it
is condensed into its adjacent elements for each direction in which the elbow travels.
The default value is TRUE.
Use Pipe Materials Only

Instructs the software to apply pipe materials only as defined by the PCF
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 identifiers.
Activating this option replaces the material of various components (elbows, valves, flanges,
reducers, tees, and so forth) with the appropriate piping material, where possible, leading to a
much more homogenous CAESAR II model. Matching components to their corresponding piping
material is done by assembling a matrix of Pipe Spec/diameter combinations, based the
available data transmitted in the PCF. Where an exact match is available, the material
substitution is made. Where piping materials are available for the Pipe Spec but not the
diameter, a match is made to the closest diameter. Where no piping material is available for the
Pipe Spec, the component material is retained. For example, A106 Grade B would be applied
but A234 Grade WPB would be ignored.
If you choose to condense Rigids, Tees, or Elbows, set Use Pipe Materials Only to
TRUE.
Combine PCF Files

Converts and combines PCFs in the dialog box into a single CAESAR II model. You are
prompted for the name of the combined CAESAR II file.
When you merge multiple PCFs into a single CAESAR II model using Combine PCF
Files, line numbers are assigned based on the originating PCF name.
Model Rotation
The rotation of the +X-axis of the CAESAR II model should be rotated about the vertical axis
away from the PCF's East compass point. The default setting is zero, which imposes no rotation.
Select +90 to rotate the model a positive 90-degrees. Select -90 to rotate the model a negative
90-degrees.
Z can also be vertical based on special execution setting.
Alternatively, you can rotate the model after importing it to CAESAR II. Use the Rotate
command on the Block Operations toolbar.

Diameter Limit
Use this to exclude the processing of small pipes, such as vents and drains, by specifying the
size (nominal diameter) below which pipes will be ignored. Enter a diameter limit of -1.000 to
include all pipe sizes that you want to import into CAESAR II.
Material Number
Select the CAESAR II material to be assigned to components which do not have the material
attribute explicitly set otherwise.
The default is low carbon steel (material number 1).
Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness

Select the default schedule of the pipe to be used in case the wall thickness of the pipe cannot
be determined from the PCF.
Show Informational Messages

Displays informational messages upon the conversion of nominal to actual diameters, schedule
to wall thickness, and specific gravity to density. Click Environment > Show Informational
Messages.
Clear the check box to suppress these messages.
Reset View on Refresh

Controls the way graphics behave when you add or modify elements. When this option is
turned on, CAESAR II resets the plot to the default view each time you refresh.
CAESAR II Configuration
Opens the configuration file for review and editing. For more information, see Configuration and
Environment (on page 48).

Global Menu
Performs actions associated with commands you can perform on a group of elements, such as
the block operations (Rotate, Invert, and so forth).
Rotate
Rotates elements defined in the block.
Displays the Block Rotate dialog box. This dialog box rotates the block through some angle
about the X, Y, or Z axis. For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 377).
Unskew
Returns skewed geometry to an orthogonal orientation.
Setup
Determines what in the block should be rotated, including restraints, displacements,
force/moments, uniform loads, flexible nozzles, flanges, and element characteristics. The
default is for all items that appear in the block to be rotated with the block.
Degrees
Specifies the degrees of the rotation.
Add Bends
Specifies that the software includes bends in the block rotation.
Delete
Deletes the selected block of elements.
A confirmation message displays before the delete action is taken.
For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 377).
Duplicate
Duplicates elements in a block.
Displays the Block Duplicate dialog box. You can make identical copies of the block. You can
also make a mirror image by flipping the chosen elements in one of the orthogonal planes.
Mirror imaging is done on the piping delta dimensions only. That is, restraints are copied but not
mirror imaged. A +Y restraint does not become a -Y restraint when mirrored in the XZ plane.

Setup - Restraints, displacements, forces/moments, uniform loads, nozzles, flanges, and

element characteristics can be individually included or excluded from the duplication.
After the type of duplication is determined, you must decide the following:
Where in the Elements List to put the duplicated group of elements, either at the end of the
current block, the end of the input file, or after a specific element in the model.
What node increments to add to the nodes in the block so that they define unique pipe
elements. Be sure this increment is large enough to avoid any duplication of node numbers.

Renumber
Rearrange the node numbers in the block.
Why use the Renumber command?
You can use this feature to clean up part or all of the piping system. It is not unusual to put the
entire model in one block and do a full renumber of all of the nodes.
To renumber the node numbers in a block
Make copies of any large jobs before renumbering them. Be particularly careful when
renumbering systems containing large numbers of interconnected restraints with CNodes.
Select the block of nodes you want to renumber from the 3D Graphics pane or in the Elements
dialog box.
Click the Renumber icon in the Block Operations toolbar.
The Block Renumber dialog box displays.
Select whether you want the software to increment or renumber the block nodes.
Select Increment to renumber the selected block of nodes by the Node Increment you specify.
For example, if you have nodes of 10, 30, 600, 25 and 670 in a block, and you select Increment
and specify a Node Increment of 100, the software changes the node numbering in the block to
110, 130, 700, 125 and 770, respectively.
Select Renumber to activate the Start Node box and renumber the selected block of nodes
from the Start Node number by the Node Increment that you specify. For example, if you have
nodes of 10, 30, 600, 25, and 670 in a block, and you select Renumber and specify a Start

Node of 100 and a Node Increment of 10, the software changes the node block numbering to
100, 110, 120, 130, and 140, respectively.
Be sure that the Start Node and Node Increment values results in unique node
numbers for the elements being renumbered.
If you want to renumber the nodes of the elements that are connected to the selected block,
leave the Renumber the boundary nodes check box selected.
CAESAR II renumbers the nodes of the elements that are connected to the selected block and
the model remains connected in the same way as it was before the renumber. The boundary
nodes include the From and To nodes of the elements connected to the selected block, plus the
nodes of the auxiliary data block that are connected to the selected block.
The software renumbers every node in the selected block on the model.
If you clear the Renumber Boundary Nodes check box, the software does not apply the
increment or renumber action to restraints, displacements and branch connections in the
selected block of nodes.
CAESAR II does not typically renumber a CNode in a block, because the CNode is connected to
a node outside the block. The software does not renumber CNodes if they do not connect to a
node in the block and on the piping system.
To avoid any confusion in these instances, start the renumbering at a node greater than the
largest node in the model. If all of the nodes renumber successfully (that is, there are not any
dangling CNodes), then you can specify a Node Increment with a negative increment to shift
the newly renumbered nodes back into the original range.
Typically, you may graphically select multiple blocks to renumber. However CAESAR II can only
perform the renumber operation for the first block. In this case, CAESAR II displays a message
box with information about which block that is renumbered. You can then continue to renumber
the second block and so on until all blocks are renumbered.
Invert
Assigns new From Node and To Node values to the selected block of elements. The Invert
command reverses the order of the elements in the selected group as well as the node
numbering while preserving the geometry of the input model.
Contiguous segments (sets of elements) may be selected in either the Elements dialog
box, the 3D Graphics pane, or the Line Numbers dialog box.

Why use the Invert command?

The Invert command can be very helpful when you have imported a new piping input model from
an external source, such as a Piping Component File (PCF), and you want to re-assign node
numbers. For example, for an imported run from a termination to a tee, invert it to run from the
tee to the termination.
To invert a block of elements
1. Select the block of elements (nodes) you want to invert, either from the Elements dialog box
or from the 3D Graphics pane or from the Line Numbers dialog box.
If you select a block of elements from the Elements dialog box or from the Line
Numbers dialog box, the corresponding elements are selected (highlighted) in the 3D
Graphics panel.
If you select a block of elements in the 3D Graphics pane or from the Line Numbers
dialog box, the corresponding elements are NOT selected (highlighted) in the Elements
dialog box.
2. Click the Invert icon on the Block Operations tool bar.
Alternatively, right-click in the Elements dialog box to display the menu and click Block
Operation > Invert.
The node numbers are reversed.
Notice that nothing changes in the 3D Graphics pane- only the node numbers are
changed.
3. Review the Elements dialog box to verify the new node number assignments.
The From Node and To Node values are renumbered for the selected elements.
For example:
Element Number Original node numbers New node number
21 95 - 100 115 - 110
22 100- 105 110 -105
23 105 - 110 105 - 100
24 110 - 115 100 - 95
Change Sequence
Changes or rearranges the sequence (order) of elements while preserving the geometry.

Why use the Change Sequence command?

Typically, the Elements dialog box displays by the order of elements entered during the input
process. The order in the list is important because when you specify some particular input
values for an element in the list, that value propagates to all the elements in the list following it
UNTIL the value is explicitly changed.
When you import piping model data (in the form of PCFs) from other piping input design
software such as Intergraph Smart3D, CAESAR II imports the elements in one sequence.
However, that sequence may not be what you want. For example, you may want all the high
pressure elements to be listed together. This reduces the number of unique input fields to verify
and can help you to logically organize the model. You can re-organize elements in a way so that
those with similar carry-forward properties are placed consecutively.
To change the sequence of elements
1. Select the block of elements (nodes) whose sequence you want to change, either from the
Elements dialog box, from the 3D Graphics pane, or from Line Numbers dialog box.
2. Click Change Sequence in the Block Operations tool bar.

Alternately, you can right-click in the Elements dialog box, and then click Block Operations
> Change Sequence.
The Change Sequence dialog box displays.
3. Choose where in the list you want to move the selected block.
To move the selected block after a given element, click Follow.
To move the selected block before a given element, click Precede.
The cursor changes to indicate the operation is in progress.
4. From the Elements dialog box, position the cursor in the line where you want the selected
block to be placed. Alternatively, you can select elements in the 3D Graphics pane and then
click on the element where you want to move them.
The selected block of elements displays in the new order.
The 3D graphics model does not change. This command only affects the Elements
dialog box display contents. Remember that this command provides you with the capability
of organizing "like" types of elements together.
To re-store the order of the Elements dialog box to the original list, use the
Undo button.

Options Menu
Performs actions associated with the display of the model.
Range
Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful when you need
to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large model. This command displays
the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
Using the Range command affects the display and operation of other 3D graphics
highlighting options. For example, if part of the model is not visible because of the use of the
Range command, then the Diameters command only highlights the elements that are
visible. Also, if using the Range command hides any nodes containing the predefined
displacements, the Displacements legend grid still displays, but the model may not highlight
correctly.
Find may not work properly for the part of the model that is hidden by the range. The
corresponding message displays in the status bar.
Range Dialog Box

Restraints
Turns the display of restraints on or off on the current model. Click the arrow on the icon to
indicate what size you want the restraints to display on your model , as well as whether or not
the software displays restraints with or without connecting nodes (CNodes).
Anchors
Turns the display of anchors on or off.
Click the arrow on the icon to indicate what size you want the anchors to display on your model,
as well as whether or not the software displays anchors with or without connecting nodes
(CNodes).

Displacements
Turns the display of displacements on or off.
Hangers
Turns the display of hangers on or off.
Click the arrow on the icon to indicate what size you want the hangers to display on your model ,
as well as whether or not the software displays anchors with or without connecting nodes
(CNodes).
Nozzle Flexibility
Turns the display of nozzle flexibility on or off.
Flange Check
Turns flange checking on or off.
Nozzle Check
Turns nozzle checking on or off.
Forces
Updates the model to show each force in a different color. Use this option to see the force
variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the force defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
The force parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click Next >>
and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads
Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use this option to see the
uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the uniform loads defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click
Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node number
where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates throughout the
model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.

Wind/Wave
Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color. Use this option to
see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key
displays the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data.
Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data defined
display in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.
Compass
Turns the display of the orientation tee on or off.
Node Numbers
Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N.
You can display node numbers for a specific element such as only restraints or only
anchors by selecting the down arrow from the Node Numbers option on the Plot Tools toolbar
in piping input. Select Names Only from the options to display only the node names on the
model, and not the node numbers.
Length
Turns the display of element lengths on or off. Alternatively, press L.
Tees
Turns the display of tees on or off.
Expansion Joints
Turns the display of expansion joints on or off.
Diameters
Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this option to see the
diameter variations throughout the system or to verify that diameter changes have been made.
Alternatively, press D. A color key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs.

Wall Thickness
Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color. Use this option to see the
wall thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press W. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Corrosion
Updates the model to show each corrosion allowance in a different color. Use this option to
see the corrosion variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the corrosion allowances defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Piping Codes
Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use this option to see the
piping code variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Material
Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this option to see the
material variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press M. A color key displays the materials defined in the model. You can change
Pipe Density
Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use this option to see the
pipe density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the pipe densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Fluid Density
Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use this option to see the
fluid density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the fluid densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.

Refractory Thickness
Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the refractory thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned
Refractory Density
Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color. Use this option to see the
refractory density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
Insulation Thickness
Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different color. Use this option to
see the insulation thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have
been made. Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model.
You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Insulation Density
Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color. Use this option to
see the insulation density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
Cladding Thickness
Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the cladding thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned
Cladding Density
Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color. Use this option to see the
cladding density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned

Insul/Cladding Unit Wt.

Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a different color. Use this
option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can change
Temperatures
Displays the temperature parameters that you have defined.
Pressures
Displays the pressure parameters that you have defined.
View Menu
Performs actions associated with viewing the model.
Toolbars
Changes the toolbars. The toolbars can be displayed or hidden by clicking View > Toolbars and
checking or unchecking the toolbar.
You can customize where toolbars display and their locations. Click View > Toolbars, or
right-click the toolbar, and then select Customize. You can also customize toolbars by pressing
Shift and dragging buttons to new positions.
Customize Dialog Box
Controls options for customizing the CAESAR II interface.
Click Reset on the Customize dialog box to undo changes.
Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Options Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Keyboard Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Menus Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

The Classic Piping Input and the 3D Model include the following toolbars.
Standard Toolbar (on page 346)
Standard Operators Toolbar (on page 347)
Standard Views Toolbar (on page 348)
Display Options Toolbar (see "Display Options" on page 349)

Cutting Planes Toolbar (on page 350)

Markups Toolbar (see "Markups" on page 349)
Plot Tools Toolbar (on page 350)
Legends Toolbar (on page 351)
Edit Mode Toolbar (on page 352)
CAESAR II Tools Toolbar (on page 353)
Navigation Tools Toolbar (on page 353)
Reset and Refresh Tools Toolbar (on page 354)
List Operations Toolbar (on page 354)
Input Tools Toolbar (on page 355)
Block Operations Toolbar (on page 356)
Aux Tools Toolbar (on page 357)
Edit Tools Toolbar (on page 358)
Reference CAD Models Toolbar (on page 359)
Wizards Toolbar (on page 359)
Import Model Toolbar (on page 359)
Organization Tools Toolbar (on page 360)
Input Card Toolbar (on page 360)
Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains the following functions.
New - Starts a new piping job. You can also click File > New on the main menu. CAESAR II
opens the New Job Name Specification dialog box.
Open - Opens a different piping input job. You are prompted for the file to open.
Save - Saves the selected piping input job. You are prompted for the file name.
Cut - Removes the selected data from its current location and places a copy on the
Clipboard.
Copy - Creates a copy of the selected data and places it on the Clipboard.
Paste - Places a copy of the Clipboard contents in the specified location
Print - Prints the selected piping input job.

Standard Operators Toolbar

The Standard Operators toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog
box or the 3D Model, contains the following functions.
When you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another
operator. (For example, Move Geometry stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
Zoom to Extents - Fits the entire model in the view.
Zoom to Window - Changes the magnification of the model to fit an area that you specify.
Click one corner of the area and then while holding the mouse button, stretch a box
diagonally to the opposite corner of the area
Zoom to Selection - Fits the selected element in the view.
Orbit - Rotates the model interactively. Rotate the model using the mouse or the arrow keys
on the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the left mouse button on the model to start a
bounding box. Hold the left mouse button and move the mouse to the other end of the
bounding box. Release the mouse button to update the view. If the bounding box is not
visible, check the corresponding box on the User Options tab of the Plot Configuration
dialog box For more information, see 3D Graphics Configuration (see "Configuring 3D
Graphics" on page 381). During rotation, the model may in centerline mode, or some of the
geometry details may disappear or become distorted. This is to improve the display speed.
The actual conversion depends on the size and complexity of the model. After the rotation is
complete, the model returns to its original state.
Orbit Vertical- Rotates the model on the vertical axis only.
Pan - Pans the model. The cursor changes to a hand. Move the cursor while holding down
the left mouse button. You can also pan the view while another command is active by
holding the center mouse button (or wheel) down while moving the mouse. This provides
the panning effects of riding the elevator up/down or stepping to either side.
Zoom - Increases or decreases the magnification of the model. Move the cursor up or down
holding the left mouse button. Release the mouse button to stop the zoom. Alternatively,
press + and - to zoom in and out. You can change the zoom level of the model while in
another command by rotating the mouse wheel.
Walkthrough - Explores the model with a setup similar to a virtual reality application. This
command produces the effect of walking towards the model. For more information, see
Walking Through the Model (on page 388).
Select Element - Select a single element in the model. Hover over an element in the model
to display information about that element. Press Ctrl when you select to add or remove
elements from the selection.
Select Group - Select a group of elements in the model by dragging a window around
them. You can add elements to the selection by pressing Ctrl while dragging the window.
Remove elements from the selection by pressing Shift while dragging the window.

Shaded View - Displays the model as shaded 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
information items display.
Hidden Line Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame with hidden lines removed.
Restraints and other element information items display.
Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame. Restraints and other element information
items display.
Silhouette - Displays the model as a silhouette, or a two-line plot. Restraints and other
element information items display.
Translucent Objects - Displays the model as translucent 3D shapes. Restraints and other
element information items display. You can select Translucent Objects with any of the
other display options (Shaded View, Hidden Line Wire Frame, Wire Frame, Silhouette,
Center Line View). Select a different type of operator to deactivate Translucent Objects.
Center Line View - Displays model data in single line mode. This often makes the view
clearer. In this mode, restraints and other element information items display. Display the
volume or double line plot by clicking the corresponding button. Press V to switch among
the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center
Line View.
Standard Views Toolbar

The Standard Views toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box
or the 3D Model, contains the following functions.
Front - Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.
Back - Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Top - Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom - Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left - Displays the model from the left. Alternatively, press X.
Right - Displays the model from the right. Alternatively, press Shift + X.
Southeast ISO View - Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively,
press F10.

Display Options
The Display Options toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box
Plot Properties - Opens the Plot Settings dialog where you can adjust properties for the
current model.
Perspective - Displays the model in perspective mode.
Orthographic - Displays the model in orthographic mode.
Markups
The Markups toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
Freehand Markup - Draws a line in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the line.
Rectangle Markup - Draws a rectangle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the
rectangle.
Circle Markup - Draws a circle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the circle.
Annotate - Adds a brief description to the model. The annotation may be especially useful
in the output processor. The annotation text box is a single line. Annotation is printed and
saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not saved to HTML.
Annotate w/Leader - Adds a brief description to the model. This annotation includes a
leader line. Drag the annotation box to extend the leader. The annotation text box is a single
line. The annotation with a leader stays with the model when you zoom, pan, rotate, or use
any of the highlight options. Annotation is printed and saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not
saved to HTML.
The markup annotation text box is a single line. The color and the font face/size cannot be
changed. The default color is red.
Markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer.
The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary. They are not saved
with the model. These graphics and disappear from view with any change such as zoom,
rotate, pan, or reset all.
The color, font face, and size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu. For more information, see 3D Graphics Configuration
(see "Configuring 3D Graphics" on page 381).
When you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another operator.
(For example, Freehand Markup stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)

Cutting Planes Toolbar

The Cutting Planes toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
the 3D Model, contains the following functions.
3D Cutting Plane - Defines the cutting plane for the model. This option is useful when
trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements or node numbers are
not defined consecutively. Because of this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the model at
a certain location to see more details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the handles to move and or rotate the planes. If cutting
the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, use the Zoom command to
expand the view. To disable the cutting plane, select the command again.
This command can be used along any of the three axes.
Plot Tools Toolbar

The Plot Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
Restraints - Turns the display of restraints on or off on the current model. For more
information, see Restraints.
Anchors - Turns the display of anchors on or off on the current model. For more
information, see Anchors (on page 340).
Hangers - Turns the display of hangers on or off on the current model. For more
information, see Hangers (on page 341).
Displacements - Turns the display of displacements on or off on the current model.
Nozzles - Turns the display of nozzle flexibility on or off on the current model.
Flanges - Turns the display of flanges on or off on the current model.
Nozzle Limits - Turns nozzle checking on or off on the current model. You can also specify
the size the nozzle limit that displays on the model by clicking the arrow on the icon and
choosing a size.
Expansion Joints & Rigids - Turns the display of expansion joints or rigid elements on or
off on the current model.
Tees - Turns the display of Tees on or off on the current model.
Compass - Turns the display of the orientation compass on or off on the current model. The
compass indicates the X, Y and Z axis direction of the model.

Node Numbers - Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N. You
can display node numbers for a specific element such as only restraints or only anchors by
selecting the down arrow from the Node Numbers option on the Plot Tools toolbar in
piping input. Select Names Only from the options to display only the node names on the
model, and not the node numbers.
Lengths - Turns the display of element lengths on or off on the model. Alternatively, press
L.
Range - Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful when
you need to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large model. This
command displays the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U. For more information, see
Range (on page 340).
Find Node - Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box
that allows you to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You can
enter the node numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only the From
node number, the software searches for the first available element that starts with that node
number. If you enter only the To node number, the software searches for an element ending
with that node number. When the software locates the element it highlights the element and
fits it in the view. You can zoom out to better identify the location of the highlighted element
within the model.
Legends Toolbar
The Legends toolbar lets you quickly view legends for areas of the model input. You can access
this toolbar from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar contains the
following functions.
Materials- Opens the Materials legend, where you can make changes to the color display
settings for materials on the model.
Piping Codes - Opens the Piping Codes legend, where you can view and make changes to
the color display settings for piping codes on the model.
Insulation - Opens the Insulation legend, where you can view and make changes to the
color display settings for insulation on the model.
Diameter - Opens the Pipe Diameters legend, where you can view pipe diameter
dimensions and make changes to the color display settings for pipes on the model.
Wall Thickness - Opens the Wall Thickness legend, where you can view wall thickness
dimensions and make changes to the color display settings for wall thicknesses on the
model.
Forces - Opens the Forces/Moments legend, where you can view the forces and moments
applied to each node and make changes to the color display settings for forces and
moments on the model. Click the arrow buttons at the top of the legend to scroll through the
various forces and moments.

Uniform Loads - Opens the Uniform Loads legend, where you can view the uniform loads
applied to each node and make changes to the color display settings for uniform loads on
the model. Click the arrow buttons at the top of the legend to scroll through the various
uniform loads.
Wind/Wave - Opens the Wind/Wave Loads legend, where you can view the the wind or
wave loads applied to each node and make changes to the color display settings for loads
on the model. Click the arrow buttons at the top of the legend to scroll through the various
wind or wave loads.
Show Temps- Opens the Temperatures legend, where you can view the temperatures of
model elements and make changes to the color display settings for temperatures.
Show Pressures- Opens the Pressures legend, where you can view the pressures on
model elements and make changes to the color display settings for pressures.
Corrosion - Opens the Corrosion legend, where you can view the elements that have
corrosion specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing corrosion.
Pipe Density- Opens the Pipe Density legend, where you can view the elements with pipe
density specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing pipe density.
Fluid Density- Opens the Fluid Density legend, where you can view the elements with fluid
density specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing fluid density.
Insulation Density- Opens the Insulation Density legend, where you can view the elements
with insulation density specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing
insulation density.
Edit Mode Toolbar

The Edit Mode toolbar lets you move selected elements on the model. You can access this
toolbar from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar contains the
Move Geometry - Moves selected elements to a new location in the model.
Move Geometry (X-Axis) - Moves selected elements along the x-axis on the model.
Move Geometry {Y-Axis) - Moves selected elements along the y -axis on the model.
Move Geometry (Z-Axis) - Moves selected elements along the z-axis on the model.
For more information, see Moving Elements (on page 389).

CAESAR II Tools Toolbar

The CAESAR II Tools toolbar contains common functions to the CAESAR II software. You can
access this toolbar from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar
contains the following functions.
CAESAR II Configuration - Contains instructions specifying how CAESAR II operates on a

particular computer and how it performs a particular analysis. Each time that you open the
software, it searches for this configuration file in the current data directory and uses it to
perform the analysis. For more information, see Configuration and Environment (on page
48).
Start/Run (Error Checker) - Sends the model through interactive error checking. This is the
first step of analysis. When the error check is complete, the Errors and Warnings dialog
box displays the results. For more information, see Error Checking (on page 522).
Batch Run - Error checks the model in a non-interactive way. This process halts only for
fatal errors. It uses the existing or default static load cases and performs the static analysis.
Edit Static Load Cases - Displays the Static Analysis dialog box. For more information on
static analysis, see Static Load Case Editor.
View Static Results - Provides an interactive review of static analysis results for the open
job. The Static Output Processor window automatically displays upon completion of a
static analysis. For more information, see Static Output Processor (on page 575).
Dynamic Analysis - Performs dynamic analysis on a piping model. The command is also
available from Analysis > Dynamics. For more information, see Dynamic Analysis
Workflow (on page 635).
Navigation Tools Toolbar

The Navigation Tools toolbar contains functions that help you move about the Classic Piping
Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar contains the following functions.
First Element - Skips to the first element.
Previous Element - Skips to the previous element.
Next Element - Skips to the next element.
Last Element - Skips to the last element.
Continue - Moves the dialog box to the next element in the model. The software adds a
new element if there is no next element.

Duplicate Element - Duplicates the last element in a model so that you can quickly
continue building the model. Select the last element, and then click Duplicate Element. For
more information on duplicating groups of elements in a model, see Duplicate (on page
334).
If you select an element that is not at the end of the model and click Duplicate
Element, the software continues to the next element in the model without duplicating the
selected element.
Reset and Refresh Tools Toolbar

The Reset and Refresh Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input
dialog box, the 3D Model, and the Structural Modeler, contains the following functions.
Reset Plot - Resets the view to the default settings.

Reset Plot is not available on the Structural Modeler.
Reset View - Controls the way graphics behave when you add or modify elements. When
this option is turned on, CAESAR II resets the plot to the default view each time you refresh.
Lock Graphics - Locks the 3D model so you cannot make any graphics updates. When the
graphic is locked, the icon displays highlighted in the toolbar. Click Lock Graphics again to
unlock the model for updating.
Lock Graphics is not available on the Structural Modeler.
List Operations Toolbar

The List Operations toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box
List Input - Displays the model in a spreadsheet view at the bottom of the Classic Piping
Input dialog box. From this view, you can quickly review and enter input data. Additionally,
you can rotate the 3D model along the various axes and duplicate input values from the List
Input view.

Input Tools Toolbar

The Input Toolbars toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
the 3D Model, contains the following functions.
Archive - Assigns a password to the job to prevent inadvertent alteration of the model or to
type the password to unlock the file. Archived input files cannot be altered or saved without
this password; however, they can be opened and reviewed. For more information, see
Archive Dialog Box (on page 232).
Insert - Inserts an element. For more information, see Insert Element Dialog Box.
Delete - Deletes the current element.
Break - Divides an element into two or more individual elements. For more information, see
Break (on page 245).
Global Coordinates - Specifies the absolute (global) coordinates for the start node of each
discontiguous system segment. For more information, see Global (on page 238).
Close Loop - Closes a loop by filling in the delta coordinates between two nodes in the
model.
Increment Node - Specifies the increment between nodes. CAESAR II uses the nodal
increment set in Configure/Setup when generating the From and To nodes for new
elements. You can override this behavior by typing a different value in this dialog box. For
more information, see Auto Node Number Increment (on page 69).
Distance - Finds the distance between two specified nodes or between any two points you
select on the model.
Valve Flange Database - Provides access to the valve and flange databases. This
command displays the Valve and Flange Database: <database name> dialog box. For
more information, see Valve (on page 247).
Expansion Joint Modeler - Displays the Expansion Joint Database <data file> and
Expansion Joint Modeler dialog boxes. For more information, see Expansion Joint (on
page 252).
Title - Displays the title page of the current job. This is up to 60 lines of text that is stored
with the problem, and may be used for detailing run histories, discussing assumptions, and
so on. These lines may be printed with the output report through the input echo.
Hanger Design Criteria - Specifies hanger design criteria for the current model. For more
information, see Hanger Design Control Data (on page 262).
Intersection SIF Scratchpad - Opens a scratchpad for calculating stress intensification

factors (SIFs) for various intersection configurations under different codes. For more
information, see Intersection Stress Intensification Factors (on page 783).

Bend SIF Scratchpad - Opens a scratchpad for calculating stress intensification factors
(SIFs) for various bend configurations under different codes. You can access this
scratchpad by selecting Analysis > SIFs @ Bends or through the Bend SIF Scratchpad
option on the Classic Piping input or on the 3D model.
Special Execution Options - Displays the Special Execution Parameters dialog box.
Click Environment > Special Execution Parameters. These parameters remain set for
that particular job.
Undo - Reverses or cancels any modeling steps. This can also be accomplished by
pressing Ctrl-Z. You can undo an unlimited number of steps. Undo is limited only by the
amount of available memory.
Redo - Repeats the last step done You can redo an unlimited number of steps. Redo is
limited by the amount of available memory.
Block Operations Toolbar

The Block Operations toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box
or the 3D Model, contains the following functions. For more information, see Performing Block
Operations (on page 377).
Rotate- Rotates elements defined in the block. For more information, see Rotate (on page
334).
Duplicate- Duplicates elements in a block. For more information, see Duplicate (on page
334).
Delete - Deletes the selected block of elements.
Renumber - Rearrange the node numbers in the block. For more information, see
Renumber (on page 336).
Invert- Assigns new From Node and To Node values to the selected block of elements. The
Invert command reverses the order of the elements in the selected group as well as the
node numbering while preserving the geometry of the input model.
Contiguous segments (sets of elements) may be selected in either the Elements
dialog box, the 3D Graphics pane, or the Line Numbers dialog box.
For more information, see Invert (on page 337).
Change Sequence - Changes or rearranges the sequence (order) of elements while

preserving the geometry. For more information, see Change Sequence (on page 338).

Aux Tools Toolbar

The Aux Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains auxiliary data functions most often used in piping input. Use this toolbar to
quickly access the Auxiliary Data dialog box found in the piping input. This toolbar includes the
Bend - Puts a bend at the To node of every element that you have selected on
the model. Select an element(s) on the model and click Bend to view the Bends
tab on the Auxiliary Data dialog box of the current piping input job. Click the
down arrow to change the icon function to delete all bends or toggle between the
select and delete functions.
Rigids - Replaces the element(s) that you selected with a rigid. Select an
element(s) on the model and click Rigids to view the Rigids tab on the Auxiliary
Data dialog box of the current piping input job. Click the down arrow to change
the icon function to delete all rigid elements or toggle between the select and
delete functions.
Expansion Joint - Replaces the currently selected element with an expansion

joint. Select an element(s) on the model and click Expansion Joint to view the
Expansion Joints tab on the Auxiliary Data dialog box of the current piping input
job. Click the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all expansion joints
or toggle between the select and delete functions.
Reducer - Select an element(s) on the model and click Reducer to view the
Reducers tab on the Auxiliary Data dialog box of the current piping input job.
Click the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all reducers or toggle
between the select and delete functions (Toggle).
SIFs/Tees - Inserts a SIF or Tee at the end of the selected elements on the
model.
Restraints - Adds a restraint to each of the selected elements on the model.
Hangers - Adds a hanger to each of the selected elements on the model. Click
the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all hangers or toggle
between the select and delete functions.
Nozzles - Adds a nozzle to each of the selected elements on the model.
Displacements - Adds a displacement at each of the selected elements on the

model.
Forces/Moments - Adds a forces and moments at each of the selected elements

on the model.
Wind/Wave - Adds wind or wave details to each of the selected elements on the
model.

Uniform Loads - Adds a uniform load to each of the selected elements on the
model.
Allowables - Adds an allowable stress at each of the selected elements on the

model.
Node Names - Adds a node name to each of the selected elements on the
model.
Offsets - Adds an offset to each of the selected elements on the model.
Flange - Adds a flange to either end or both ends of the selected elements on the
model. Click the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all flanges or
toggle between the select and delete functions.
Edit Tools Toolbar

The Edit Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains icons that let you access the most commonly used editing windows in piping
input. This toolbar includes the following functions.
Node Number Edit Window- Displays the Edit Node Numbers dialog box. For more
information, see Node Numbers (on page 108).
Mini-Delta Box - Displays the Edit Deltas dialog box. For more information, see Deltas
(on page 110).
Mini-Pipe Size Box - Displays the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box. For more information, see
Pipe Sizes (on page 113).
Mini-Temps and Pressures Box - Displays the Edit Operating Conditions dialog box.
For more information, see Temperatures (on page 117).
Mini-Material Box - Displays the Edit Materials dialog box. For more information, see
Materials (on page 199).
Mini-Elastic Properties Box - Displays the Edit Elastic Properties dialog box. For more
information, see Material Elastic Properties (on page 222).
Mini-Densities Box - Displays the Edit Densities dialog box. For more information, see
Densities (on page 224).
Mini-Aux Screens Box - Displays the Auxiliary Data dialog box. For more information,
see Auxiliary Element Data (on page 1045).

Reference CAD Models Toolbar

The Reference CAD Models toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input
dialog box or the 3D Model, contains icons that let you import CAD-based models into the piping
CADWorx Model - Opens a CADWorx model for use with this model. If you have already
opened a CADWorx model, click the down arrow on the icon to select Load CWx Model.
For more information, see Open CADWorx Model (on page 231).
S3D/SPR Model - Opens the Load S3D/SPR Model (see "Load an S3D/SPR Model" on
page 390) dialog box. If you have already opened a S3D or SPR model, click the down
arrow on the icon to select other options, including the Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model, Dim
S3D/SPR Model, S3D/SPR Visibility Options. These options only display when you have
a S3D/SPR model already open. For more information, see S3D/SPR Import View (see
"S3D/SPR Model View" on page 390) and S3D/SPR Visibility Options (on page 395).
Wizards Toolbar
The Wizards toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D
Model, contains icons that let you access the most commonly used wizards in piping input. This
toolbar includes the following functions.
Static Seismic Wizard - Opens the Seismic Wizard, which selects a

particular Seismic Code and its associated data. For more information,
see Seismic Wizard (on page 268).
Optimization Wizard - Opens the Optimization Wizard, which assists

with expansion loop design. For more information, see Optimization
Wizard (on page 275).
Import Model Toolbar

The Import Model toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
the 3D Model, contains functions that let you access various import dialog boxes used in piping
Include Piping Files - Opens the Include Piping Files dialog box, which lets you include
other piping models into the current piping model. For more information, see Include Piping
Input Files (on page 304).

Include Structural Files - Opens the Include Structural Files dialog box, , which lets you
include structural models into the current job. For more information, see Including
Structural Input Files (on page 305).
APCF - Opens the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box, which provides an
interactive, customizable way to import Piping Component Files (PCFs) into the CAESAR II
piping environment. For more information, see Advanced PCF Import (APCF) (on page
305).
Organization Tools Toolbar

The Organization Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog
box or the 3D Model, contains functions let you organize or move the elements on a model. This
toolbar includes the following functions.
Move Geometry - Selects or moves nodes or node groups on the model.
Move Geometry (X-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the X axis.
Move Geometry (Y-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the Y axis.
Move Geometry (Z-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the Z axis.
Input Card Toolbar

The Input Card toolbar, which you can access from the Structural Modeler, contains the
Copy the selected card - Copies the selected card from current card stack.
Paste the previously copied card - Pastes the card you previously copied into the card
stack.
Delete selected card - Deletes the selected card from the current card stack.

Limiting the Display

Sometimes it is necessary to limit the amount of information displayed on the screen. This may
be useful when the model is large, or if it has many similar looking branches.
Find - Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box
that allows you to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You
can enter the node numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only
the From node number, the software searches for the first available element that
starts with that node number. If you enter only the To node number, the software
searches for an element ending with that node number. When the software locates
the element it highlights the element and fits it in the view. You can zoom out to better
identify the location of the highlighted element within the model.
trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements or node numbers
are not defined consecutively. Because of this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the
model at a certain location to see more details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the handles to move and or rotate the planes. If
cutting the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, use the Zoom
command to expand the view. To disable the cutting plane, select the command
again.
Range - Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful
when you need to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large
model. This command displays the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
For more information, see Range (on page 340).
Line Numbers - Displays the Line Numbers pane which allows graphical editing of
line numbers. You can do the following from this pane.
Assign a new line number to the block of elements that have been selected on the
3D graphical display.
Remove an existing line number.
Set and reset visibility options to hide and unhide elements.
Assign a color to an individual line number.
To reassign one or more elements from one line number to another existing line
number, simply drag-and-drop (move) the elements between existing Line Numbers in
the Line Numbers pane.
When you click the Line Number name in the Line Number pane, the
corresponding elements are highlighted in the 3D pane and are selected to perform
Block operations.

Reset
Resets the view to the default settings.
Toggle Graphics Update

Turns graphics updating on or off.
Front View
Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.
Back View
Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Top View
Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom View
Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left-side View
Displays the model from the left side. Alternatively, press X.
Right-side View
Displays the model from the right side. Alternatively, press Shift + R.
Southeast ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively, press F10.
Southwest ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the southwest.

Northeast ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the northeast.
Northwest ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the northwest.
4 View
Displays the model in four windows.
This command automatically places the horizontal and vertical dividers, or splitter bars, and
changes the cursor to a four-way arrow. You can change the position of the splitter bars by
moving the mouse. Click to fix the position.
Drag the splitter bars to change the size of the windows. Drag the splitter bars out of the view to
remove those views. You can drag the splitter located at the top or left scroll bar to add views.
You can manipulate the image in any of these panes individually.
Review Error Report

Displays the Errors and Warnings dialog box. This option is only available if you have run the
File > Error Check command. For more information, see Error Check (on page 232).
Errors and Warnings Dialog Box
Review Static Results

Displays the results of the static load analysis. This option is only available if you have run
the Edit > Edit Static Load Cases command. For more information, see Edit Static Load
Cases.
Tools Menu
Performs actions associated with toolbars, mini-windows, and importing and exporting
displacements.

Reset Toolbar Layout

Sets toolbars to the default layout.
Mini-windows
Displays a list of mini-windows that you can display. Mini-windows provide a quick way to
provide specific types of data.
Node Numbers - Displays the Edit Node Numbers dialog box.
Edit Deltas - Displays the Edit Deltas dialog box.
Pipe Sizes - Displays the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box.
Temps & Pressures - Displays the Edit Operating Conditions

dialog box.
Materials - Displays the Edit Materials dialog box.
Elastic Properties - Displays the Edit Elastic Properties dialog

box.
Densities - Displays the Edit Densities dialog box.
Auxiliary Data - Displays the Auxiliary Data dialog box.
Classic Input - Displays the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Import/Export Displacements from File

Imports or exports nodal displacements from a file.
CAESAR II Versions 5.10 and later enables you to import and export displacements to and from
a text file. This feature is very useful in situations where you need to define several
displacements in a CAESAR II model. You can import the displacements into a CAESAR II
model with a few mouse clicks instead of manually typing all the displacements in the Classic
Piping Input. A displacements file in the specified format must exist.
This feature works only on From and To nodes using a fixed file (.disp) format for
versions 5.10 and 5.20.
In CAESAR II Version 2016 (8.0) , this feature works on the From and To nodes, CNodes, and
Bend middle nodes in either the fixed file format (.disp), or the comma separated value (.csv)
format. You can easily generate and maintain a displacement file in .csv format using Microsoft
Excel.

Import/Export Displacements Dialog Box

Controls parameters for importing and exporting nodal displacements.
Export Displacements To a File
Specifies the file name for the export. Type the full path to the file, or use the browse button
to browse to the file.
Export
Exports the nodal displacements to the specified file.
Import Displacements From a File
Specifies the file name for the import. Type the full path to the file, or use the browse button
to browse to the file.
Import
Imports the specified nodal displacement file.
Displacement File Formats

A displacement file is a flat text file in (versions 5.10 and 5.20), which can be created and edited
by any text editor such as Notepad.
In CAESAR II Version 2016 (8.0) a displacement file can be in either fixed format .disp or
comma separated value format .csv.
For both formats, use * to indicate a comment line in the displacement file. You can type
anything on the line following the *.
Displacement files can have as many comment lines as necessary.
The comment line is not counted in line numbering in the file format descriptions.
Fixed Format
A fixed format displacement file has the .disp extension and this format:
1. The first line has only one the conversion factor value, which is used to divide the
translational displacements (DX, DY, and DZ) to convert them to the internal unit of inches.
2. The second line is either Y axis up or Z axis up to indicate the CAESAR II Coordinate
System that the following displacement data corresponds to.
3. All the remaining lines are displacement data lines:
a. Each line must have 58 values: Node X, Y, Z and 54 displacements for the nodes (6
degrees of freedom times 9 vectors is 54).
b. The first value is a node number.
c. The following three values, the three coordinates of a node, are ignored.
d. The final 54 values are displacements of the node, in the order: DX1, DY1, DZ1, RX1,
RY1, RZ1... DX9, DY9, DZ9, RX9, RY9, RZ9.

e. The first character space is reserved for the comment "*", each of the 58 values must be
12 characters long so the total length of a displacement data line should be 697
(1+58x12) characters long.
f. The position of each of the 54 displacement values is used to determine its location in a
CAESAR II model. For example, values at position 5, 8, 55 and 58 correspond to DX1,
and RX1, DZ9, and RZ9 of the node in the model.
g. A value must occupy a 12 character field. When a value has fewer than 12 characters,
you must pad either to the left or right of the blanks to make it 12 characters in length. If
there is no displacement value, a 12 character blank field must be reserved for it.
When creating the blank space use the Space Bar. Do not use the Tab key.
Comma Separated Value Format

A comma separated value format displacement file has the .csv extension and follows this
format:
1. The first line has only the conversion factor value, which is used to divide the translational
displacements (DX, DY, and DZ) to convert them to the internal unit of inches.
2. The second line is either Y axis up or Z axis up to indicate the CAESAR II Coordinate
System that the following displacement data corresponds to.
3. All the remaining lines are displacement data lines:
a. Each line could have 58 values: Nodes X, Y, Z and the 54 displacements for the node (6
degrees-of-freedom times 9 vectors is 54).
b. The first value is a node number, which is required.
c. The following three values, the three coordinates of the node, are ignored.
d. The final 54 values are displacements of the node, in the order: DX1, DY1, DZ1, RX1,
RY1, RZ1... DX9, DY9, DZ9, RX9, RY9, RZ9. They are optional. You can specify all 54
values, or not a single value, or any number of values in between.
e. Values are separated by commas. The length of a displacement data line is not fixed.
f. Because each value is followed by a comma, a comma counter is used to determine the
placement of the value in a CAESAR II model. For example, values at positions 5, 8, 55
and 58 correspond to DX1, and RX1, DZ9, and RZ9 of the node in the model,
respectively.
g. A value can be any number of characters in length. When there is no displacement
value, you can use a zero length or blank field. For example, if a comma is followed by a
comma, or if a comma is followed by blank spaces and then a comma, it means that its
corresponding location in a CAESAR II model has no displacement value.
Generally, the csv format is recommended for a displacement file because it is relatively easy to
generate and maintain in Microsoft Excel. The fixed format of a displacement file is more
difficult to maintain.
A displacement file from version 5.10 or 5.20 cannot be used directly in CAESAR II
Version 2016 (8.0) because the formats are different.

Warning Messages
There are three kinds of warning messages:
1. Node xxx is not in the model - Indicates that a node in the displacement file does not exist in
the CAESAR II model.
2. Node xxx could not find an empty location - Indicates that a node in the displacement file
exists in the CAESAR II model but that the software thinks that all displacement slots in the
model have already been occupied by other nodes. In this case, it is still possible for you to
input displacements for the node through the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box.
3. Node xxx does not have displacements - Indicates that a node in the displacement file does
not have a displacement value.
where xxx denotes a node number such as 100.
Generally, when a warning message is issued it indicates that an error exists either in the
displacement file or in the corresponding CAESAR II model. Carefully examine the offending
node in the displacement file or in the corresponding model and correct the error.
Summary Report
The Import and Export Summary reports are generated in the import and export operations.
The reports provide information about the nodes in a displacement file just imported into a
CAESAR II Import model:
1. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model before import.
2. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model after import.
3. The number of displacement nodes that have been read in.
4. The number of displacement nodes that are not in the model.
5. The number of displacement nodes that cannot find empty locations in the model.
6. The number of displacement nodes that do not have displacements.
7. The number of displacement nodes that have stored displacements in the model.
8. The number of displacement nodes that are replacing values in the model.
9. The number of displacement nodes that are new in the model.
Similar in operation to the warning messages, the summary report can help you identify potential
problems in a displacement file. However, you should remember the following points:
1. Because every displacement data line in a displacement file has a node number, the total
number of nodes processed is equal to the total number of displacement data lines in the
file.
2. Each displacement data line should have a unique node number. However, if the same
node number appears in many data lines, it would be counted many times. In this case, the
displacement values in the last data line are used in the model, overwriting the previous
values.
3. If no node number appears in a displacement data line, CAESAR II indicates the
corresponding data line number and stops the import process.

4. If there is a node in a displacement file that is not in the model, or cannot find a slot in the
model, or does not have a displacement, the displacement file or the model should be
checked carefully to understand the reasons behind it.
5. If a displacement node exists both in the model and the displacement file, the displacement
values from the file are used to overwrite the ones in the model, and this node is counted as
a replacement node.
6. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model after import should be equal to the
number of displacement nodes existing in the model before import, plus the number of new
displacement nodes.
7. The number of displacement nodes that have stored displacements in the model should be
equal to the number of replacement nodes, plus the number of new displacement nodes.
Exporting Displacements to a File

1. Click Tools > Import/Export Displacements from File.
The Import/Export Displacements dialog box displays.
2. Type the path and name of a displacement file in the Export Displacements To a File box,
or click ... to browse to the file.
3. Click Export to send the nodal displacements to the selected file.
4. Click Done to exit the Import/Export Displacements dialog.
If there are no displacements in a CAESAR II job, an export operation creates a
displacement template file in which all nodes are listed according to the element list.
Importing Displacements from a File

1. Click Tools > Import/Export Displacements from File.
The Import/Export Displacements dialog box displays.
2. Type the path and name of the displacement file in the Import Displacements From a File
box, or click ... to browse to the file.
The Open dialog box displays.

Two file formats can be used to create a displacement file:

Fixed format with a .disp file extension.
Commas Separated Value format with a .csv file extension.
By default, displacement files display in comma separated values format(.csv).
You can also choose displacement files with the fixed format (.disp) by clicking
Displacement Import File (*.dsp) from the Files of type list.
3. Select the displacement file.

4. Click Open.

5. Click Import.
During the import process, if an erroneous condition is detected for a displacement node a
warning message displays. A summary report is generated after all displacement data is
processed.
For more details about warning messages and the summary report, see Imposed Loads.
6. After reviewing warning messages and a summary report, click Done.
The first two figures show displacement files Notepad for disp and csv formats. The third
and fourth figures show displacement files in Microsoft Excel.
For a detailed description of both file formats, see Displacement File Formats (on page 365).

Notepad Example (*.disp) format
Notepad Example (*.csv) format
Excel Example (*.csv) format

If a CAESAR II job has no displacements the displacement export operation creates a
displacement template file as shown below.

Excel Example (*.csv) format Displacement File Template
3D Modeler
When you start CAESAR II and start the piping input processor, the software automatically
displays a graphic representation of the model to the right of the Classic Piping Input dialog
box. To increase the window space available for graphics you can hide the Classic Piping
Input dialog box by clicking . The initial view for a job that has never been plotted displays
according to the configuration defaults. These defaults include:
A rendered view - restraints shown
XYZ compass - isometric view
Tees and nozzles highlighted - orthographic projection
The plotting begins by displaying the model in centerline/single line mode to speed up the
process. Then all the elements are rendered one-by-one. Later, the restraints and other relevant
items are added.
The model is fully operational while it is being drawn. You can apply any available option
to the model at any time. The status bar at the bottom displays the drawing progress in the form

of Drawing element X of Y. When the plot operation is complete the status message changes
to Ready.
When you hover the cursor over a button, the name of the button and a short description of the
functionality displays in the status bar at the bottom of the view window.
There are several methods of accomplishing nearly every command in the Input Plot utility. You
can access commands by clicking buttons, by selecting menu items, or by using hot keys.
Center Line View - Displays model data in single line mode. This often makes the view
clearer. In this mode, restraints and other element information items display. Display the
volume or double line plot by clicking the corresponding button. Press V to switch among
the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center
Line View.
Shaded View - Displays the model as shaded 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
Silhouette - Displays the model as a silhouette. Restraints and other element information
items display.
Hidden Line Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame with hidden lines removed.
Restraints and other element information items display.

Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame. Restraints and other element
Translucent - Displays the model as translucent 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
Front - Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.
Back - Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Top - Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom - Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left - Displays the model from the left. Alternatively, press X.
Right - Displays the model from the right. Alternatively, press Shift + X.
Southeast ISO View - Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively,
press F10.
Node Numbers - Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N. Click
the down arrow to display node numbers for a specific element, such as for only restraints
or only anchors. Select Names Only to display only the node names on the model, and not
the node numbers.
Length - Turns the display of element lengths on or off. Alternatively, press L.
Select Element - Select a single element in the model. Hover over an element in the
model to display information about that element. Press Ctrl when you select to add or
remove elements from the selection.
Select Group - Select a group of elements in the model by dragging a window around
them. You can add elements to the selection by pressing Ctrl while dragging the window.
Remove elements from the selection by pressing Shift while dragging the window.
Perspective - Displays the model in perspective mode.
Orthographic - Displays the model in orthographic mode.
You can turn off the display of node numbers (for restraints, hangers, and anchors) for a
clearer view. The size of boundary condition symbols (such as restraints, anchors, and hangers)
is relative to the pipe size outer diameter. You can change the size of these symbols clicking the
black arrow to the right of the relevant button and selecting a size from the list.
You can adjust the color of the node numbers, lengths, elements, boundary conditions, and so
on by clicking Change Display Options . For more information, see 3D Graphics
Configuration (see "Configuring 3D Graphics" on page 381).

Reset - Returns the model returns to its default state as defined by the configuration. Any
elements hidden by the Range command are restored.
Zoom - Increases or decreases the magnification of the model. Move the cursor up or
down holding the left mouse button. Release the mouse button to stop the zoom.
Alternatively, press + and - to zoom in and out. You can change the zoom level of the
model while in another command by rotating the mouse wheel.
Zoom to Window - Changes the magnification of the model to fit an area that you
specify. Click one corner of the area and then while holding the mouse button, stretch a
box diagonally to the opposite corner of the area
Zoom to Selection - Fits the selected element in the view.
Zoom to Extents - Fits the entire model in the view.
Orbit - Rotates the model interactively. Rotate the model using the mouse or the arrow
keys on the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the left mouse button on the model to start
a bounding box. Hold the left mouse button and move the mouse to the other end of the
bounding box. Release the mouse button to update the view. If the bounding box is not
visible, check the corresponding box on the User Options tab of the Plot Configuration
dialog box For more information, see 3D Graphics Configuration (see "Configuring 3D
Graphics" on page 381). During rotation, the model may in centerline mode, or some of
the geometry details may disappear or become distorted. This is to improve the display
speed. The actual conversion depends on the size and complexity of the model. After the
rotation is complete, the model returns to its original state.
Pan - Pans the model. The cursor changes to a hand. Move the cursor while holding
down the left mouse button. You can also pan the view while another command is active
by holding the center mouse button (or wheel) down while moving the mouse.
Walk Through - Explores the model with a setup similar to a virtual reality application.
This command produces the effect of walking towards the model. For more information,
see Walking Through the Model (on page 388).
Load CADWorx Model - Displays the model in CADWorx.

Building Models Quickly

CAESAR II has several features that help you build models more quickly from the 3D model.
Select one or groups of elements and right-click the model to access context menus so you
can quickly perform some of your most common tasks. See Performing Single-Element
Operations (on page 376) and Performing Block Operations (on page 377) for more
information.
Limit the items you display on the model to simplify the functions you need to use. See
Limiting the Display (on page 360) for more information.
Use legends to update properties across the current model. See Updating Properties from
the 3D Model (on page 380) for more information.
Performing Single-Element Operations

Access the most frequently used commands through a right-click Element context menu, all
without ever leaving your 3D model. These commands include:
Insert, break, or delete elements
Insert, delete, and edit restraints
Look up valve and flange data from the Valve and Flange Database
Insert or delete rigid elements (such as valves and flanges)
To quickly access single element commands from the 3D model
1. Select any element on the model and right-click the element to see the commands available
from the context menu.
You must unlock the 3D model to access the right-click menu. You must also
right-click directly on the element selected to access the Element context menu.
1. Select the element command that you want to perform.
The software completes the action and moves the cursor to the next logical box on the
piping input.

Performing Block Operations

Perform block (global) operations to elements in the model using one of the following methods:
To access Block Operations commands from the 3D model

1. Access the Block Operations commands from one of the following options:
a. Click the Block Operations toolbar, or
b. Select more than one element on the model and right-click to see the block operations
available from the context menu.
You must unlock the 3D model to access the right-click element context menu.
2. Select one of the following options:
Rotate
Duplicate
Delete
Renumber
Invert
Change Sequence
You can also access block operation commands from the Global menu in piping input.
To access Block Operations commands from the Elements dialog box

1. Right-click in the Elements dialog box to display the menu.
2. Click Block Operation.
3. Select one of the sub-menu items to perform the indicated operation.
Rotate
Delete
Duplicate
Nodes

Invert
Change Sequence
Status
You can also access block operation commands from the Global menu in piping input.
To define a block of elements in the 3D model

1. Click Select Element on the Standard Operators toolbar and select a single element on
the 3D model.
The selected element highlights.
To select more than one element, press the Shift key while clicking the additional
elements.
The entire group (block) of elements highlights.
Alternatively, you can click Select Group on the Standard Operators toolbar and draw a
box around the items you want to select.
The highlighted elements define the set that any Block Operations command affects. A block
can contain any number of elements, from a single element to every element in the model.
To define a block of elements from the Elements dialog box

1. Move the cursor to the first element in the group (block) to be operated on and click the row
number for that item on the far left of the dialog box.
The software highlights the row for the element highlights in the Element dialog box and in
the 3D Graphics pane.
2. Move the cursor to the last element in the group (block) to be operated on, press Shift and
click the corresponding row number.
3. Alternatively, you can Select Group in the Standard Operators toolbar and draw a box
around the items you want to select.
The entire group (block) of elements highlights.
The highlighted rows define the elements that any block operations affect. A block may contain
any number of elements from a single element to every element in the model.
To define a block of elements by selecting by Line Number

1. Display the Line Numbers dialog box.
2. Select the element or block of elements for which you want to perform a block operation.
The corresponding element(s) highlight in the 3D Graphics pane.
The highlighted rows define the elements that any block operations change. A block may
contain any number of elements from a single element to every element in the model.

Limiting the Display

Sometimes it is necessary to limit the amount of information displayed on the screen. This may
be useful when the model is large, or if it has many similar looking branches.
Find - Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box
that allows you to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You
can enter the node numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only
the From node number, the software searches for the first available element that
starts with that node number. If you enter only the To node number, the software
searches for an element ending with that node number. When the software locates
the element it highlights the element and fits it in the view. You can zoom out to better
identify the location of the highlighted element within the model.
trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements or node numbers
are not defined consecutively. Because of this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the
model at a certain location to see more details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the handles to move and or rotate the planes. If
cutting the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, use the Zoom
command to expand the view. To disable the cutting plane, select the command
again.
Range - Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful
when you need to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large
model. This command displays the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
For more information, see Range (on page 340).
Line Numbers - Displays the Line Numbers pane which allows graphical editing of
line numbers. You can do the following from this pane.
Assign a new line number to the block of elements that have been selected on the
3D graphical display.
Remove an existing line number.
Set and reset visibility options to hide and unhide elements.
Assign a color to an individual line number.
To reassign one or more elements from one line number to another existing line
number, simply drag-and-drop (move) the elements between existing Line Numbers in
the Line Numbers pane.
When you click the Line Number name in the Line Number pane, the
corresponding elements are highlighted in the 3D pane and are selected to perform
Block operations.

Updating Properties from the 3D Model

You can update many of the piping input properties globally from within the Legends dialog box
in the 3D model.
To update a piping input property from the 3D model
1. Select the property you want to update using the Legends toolbar in 3D model.
You can also update many of these properties by right-clicking, selecting Highlights from
the context menu, and then specifying the property that you want to edit.
The Legend dialog box opens with the selected property displayed.
2. Double-click on the property value in the left column to open the Edit box.
3. Type a new value in the Edit box and press ENTER or click anywhere in the dialog box.
The software updates all elements that have the same property value, represented in the
Legend dialog box, on the 3D model, and in the List dialog box.
Currently, the software does not include global update functionality for the following
piping input properties:
Materials
Piping Codes
Forces
Uniform Loads
Wind/Wave Data
Displacements
Pipe Density

Configuring 3D Graphics
The CAESAR II 3D Graphics engine remembers the state of the model between sessions.
When you exit and return, the model displays in the same state in which it was last viewed.
To obtain a more uniform look for the graphics, change the color and font options:
1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup on the main menu to display the CAESAR II Configuration
Editor dialog box.
2. Open the Graphics Settings category.
3. Set the Always Use System Fonts and Always Use System Colors options to True under
the Visual Options section.
These settings are stored in the computer's registry and CAESAR II always displays the
graphics according to these settings.
If the settings are set to False, then the state of each model is maintained individually as an
XML data file (job- name.XML) in the current data folder. After starting another input session,
CAESAR II reads this XML file and restores the 3D graphics to its previous state. This includes
the rotation and zoom level of the model; color settings, data display, and the current graphics
operator.

Option Description
Colors Select any color item in the list, then click to display a Windows color selection
tool. Select the new color. Click Reset All to return all of the settings to CAESAR II
defaults, as defined in configuration,.
Fonts Selecting any font item in the list, then click to display the standard Windows
font selection tool. Set the options to meet your requirements and click OK.
Changing the Model Display

You can specify the way the model displays when you open a file. The session can start with a
preset command active (such as Zoom), or start with the last command still active. Similarly, the
graphics can start in a preset view (such as isometric), or in the last rotated zoomed position.
Option Description
Show Bounding Box Determines if rotations using the mouse include an outline box
surrounding the model.

Hide Overlapped Prevents text from appearing on top of other text items.
Text
Restore Previous Determines whether the software remembers your last command
Operator (operator) between sessions or always defaults to a specified
command.
Restore Previous Determines whether the graphics engine remembers the last displayed
View view of the model, or defaults to a specified view.
Default Projection Determines the initial projection style of the model.

Mode
Visibility Alters the degree of transparency when translucent pipe is activated.

Increasing this value makes it easier to see through the pipe elements.
The Visibility option is only effective when viewing the model in
rendered mode.
Markers Displays a symbol denoting the elements end points.
Highlighting Graphics
You can review the piping model in the context of certain data such as by diameter, wall
thickness, temperature, or pressure.
You can make changes to some piping input properties from the Legends dialog box. The
software updates all elements that have the same property value in the model. For more
information, see Updating Properties from the 3D Model (on page 380).
Command Description
Diameters Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this
option to see the diameter variations throughout the system or to verify
that diameter changes have been made. Alternatively, press D. A color
key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can change the
Wall Thickness Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color.
Use this option to see the wall thickness variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. Alternatively, press
W. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
Insulation Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different

Thickness color. Use this option to see the insulation thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in
the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.

You can change the display to cladding thickness or refractory

thickness by selecting that option from the list.
Cladding Thickness Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different
color. Use this option to see the cladding thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
You can change the display to insulation thickness or refractory
Refractory Thickness Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different
color. Use this option to see the refractory thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
You can change the display to insulation thickness or cladding
Material Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this
option to see the material variations throughout the system or to verify
that changes have been made. Alternatively, press M. A color key
displays the materials defined in the model. You can change the
Piping Codes Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use
this option to see the piping code variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made.
Corrosion Updates the model to show each corrosion allowance in a different

color. Use this option to see the corrosion variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the corrosion allowances defined in the model. You can change the
Pipe Density Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use
this option to see the pipe density variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays the pipe
densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Fluid Density Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use
this option to see the fluid density variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays the fluid
densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.

Insulation Density Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color.
Use this option to see the insulation density variations throughout the
the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the
You can change the display to cladding density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or refractory density by selecting that option from the list.
Cladding Density Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color.
Use this option to see the cladding density variations throughout the
the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the
You can change the display to insulation density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or refractory density by selecting that option from the list.
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt. Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a
different color. Use this option to see the variations throughout the
the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can
You can change the display to insulation density, cladding density, or
refractory density by selecting that option from the list.
Refractory Density Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color.
Use this option to see the refractory density variations throughout the
the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the
You can change the display to insulation density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or insulation density by selecting that option from the list.
The Legend dialog box can be resized, docked, or removed from view.
You can still zoom, pan, or rotate the model while in highlight mode. You can also use any of
orthographic projections and single line or volume modes without affecting the model
highlighted state.
Clicking one of the highlight commands a second time cancels the coloring effect.
If you print the model while it is in highlight mode, the color key legend displays in the upper
left corner of the page, even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the
view.

Manipulating the Toolbar

You can rearrange or remove buttons on toolbars. There are two methods to make these
adjustments.
Right-click the toolbar, and click Customize.
Remove or reposition the button using drag and drop.
To remove buttons from the toolbar click the down arrow located at the end of each toolbar and
then click Add or Remove Buttons. Turn on the check box to add buttons to the toolbar. Clear
the check box to remove buttons. To rearrange buttons, press ALT and then drag the button to
a different location. To restore the CAESAR II default toolbar configuration, click Reset .
For more information, see Toolbars (on page 345).
Displaying Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, and

Wind/Wave Loads
You can display applied or predefined displacements, forces, uniform loads, or wind and wave
loads in a table. You can scroll the display windows vertically and/or horizontally to view all node
points where data has been defined. To move through the defined displacement or force vectors
1 through 9, click Next >> and Previous <<. The color key assists you in locating the node
points on the model when the model geometry is complex.
The displacements window shows user-specified values as well as free or fixed degrees of
freedom (DOF). In this case, a DOF is free if a displacement value is not specified in any of the
displacement load vectors. If a DOF has a specified displacement in at least one of the load
vectors, then it is fixed in all other load vectors.
Forces - Updates the model to show each force in a different color. Use this option to
see the force variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the force defined in the model. You can change the
The force parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click
Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads - Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use
this option to see the uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that
changes have been made. A color key displays the uniform loads defined in the model.
You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the
data. Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force
vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node
number where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates
throughout the model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.
Wind/Wave - Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color.
Use this option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes
have been made. A color key displays the wind or wave loads defined in the model.

The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of
the data. Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data
defined display in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.
The legend window can be resized, docked, or removed from view.

You can still zoom, pan, or rotate the model while in highlight mode. You can also use any of
orthographic projections and single line or volume modes without affecting the model
highlighted state.
Clicking one of the highlight commands a second time cancels the coloring effect.
If you print the model while it is in highlight mode, the color key legend displays in the upper
left corner of the page. This is true even if the actual legend window has been dragged away
from the view.
You can display predefined displacements by pressing F3. You can display forces/moment
vectors by pressing F5.
Select Element displays element data. When this command is active, hovering the cursor
over a pipe element displays the element's nodes, delta dimensions, and pipe size data.
Clicking an element highlights the element and updates the information on the dialog box.
Click in the empty space of the graphics view to unhighlight the element. The dialog box still
contains the information from the last element that you selected.
Saving an Image for Later Presentation

Occasionally, it is necessary to add a graphical representation of a model to the CAESAR II
Stress reports. The graphics view can be saved as a graphic by clicking File > Save As
Graphics Image. The model geometry, colors, highlighting, Plot Settings legend, as well as
restraints and most of the other options are transferred to the graphic. The default graphic file
name is the job name with an extension .TIF. This is a standard Windows-supported image file
extension that can be opened for viewing. The image resolution can also be changed in the
Save Image dialog box.
This is a static graphic file.
You also have the option to save the graphics as .HTML file. After saving as .HTML CAESAR II
creates two files in the current data directory using the current job name: *.HTML and *.HSF.
Opening the .HTML file displays the corresponding .HSF file.
This is an interactive file.
The first time a CAESAR II-created .HTML file is opened with an Internet browser, you receive a
message asking you to download a control from Tech Soft 3D. Answer Yes to allow the
download, and the image displays. After the model displays, right-clicking the model shows the
available viewing options such as orbit, pan, zoom, different render modes, and so on. The
image can be printed or copied to the clipboard.
Internet Explorer (IE) version 5.0 and earlier may not display the image properly.
Intergraph CAS recommends IE6 or later.
You can use the Markups toolbar functions to add additional lines or annotations to the image.

The Markups toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
Freehand Markup - Draws a line in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the line.
Rectangle Markup - Draws a rectangle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the
rectangle.
Circle Markup - Draws a circle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the circle.
Annotate - Adds a brief description to the model. The annotation may be especially useful
in the output processor. The annotation text box is a single line. Annotation is printed and
saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not saved to HTML.
Annotate w/Leader - Adds a brief description to the model. This annotation includes a
leader line. Drag the annotation box to extend the leader. The annotation text box is a single
line. The annotation with a leader stays with the model when you zoom, pan, rotate, or use
any of the highlight options. Annotation is printed and saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not
saved to HTML.
The markup annotation text box is a single line. The color and the font face/size cannot be
changed. The default color is red.
Markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer.
The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary. They are not saved
with the model. These graphics and disappear from view with any change such as zoom,
rotate, pan, or reset all.
The color, font face, and size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu. For more information, see 3D Graphics Configuration
(see "Configuring 3D Graphics" on page 381).
When you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another operator. (For
example, Freehand Markup stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
Walking Through the Model

CAESAR II lets you explore the model with a feature similar in operation to a virtual reality
game. It produces the effect of walking towards the model. After you are close to or inside the
model, you can look left, right, up, and down, step to a side, or ride an elevator up and down.
Walk Through is useful in providing a real-time interactive view of the model.
Click Walk Through to display the cursor as a pair of feet.
Walking Around
You can begin walking by clicking and holding the left mouse button. Move forward by moving
the mouse toward the top of the window. Move back by doing the opposite.
You can also pan the view by holding the center mouse button (or wheel) down while moving
the mouse. This provides the panning effects of riding the elevator up/down or stepping to either
side.

Walk Through also provides an additional control that aids in navigation. Clicking the
various hot spots on the control duplicates mouse movements with the added benefit of
providing the ability to move in a perfectly straight line.
In addition, Walk Through also provides you with the added functionality of determining the
walking speed. In general, walking speed is determined by the distance between where you first
click and how far you move the mouse. The keys below which, if held down while walking, effect
walk through's operation:
Shift - Changes the walk mode to run mode, effectively doubling the walk speed.
Ctrl - Changes the walk mode to slow mode, effectively halving the walk speed.
Alt - Enables you to look left or right without changing the walk path. Releasing the key,
automatically returns your viewpoint to looking forward.
To exit from this command, click any other command.
Moving Elements
The Move Geometry commands, located in the Edit Mode toolbar, let you select and move
nodes or elements along a specified axis. Select the node or element, and then press Tab or
click to select the x-, y-, or z-axis option (located next to the Move Geometry option in the
toolbar). The software defaults to the X-Axis.
For example, to move a restraint along a corresponding pipe centerline, select Move Geometry
and specify the direction of the axis for the line. Or, if your model includes an expansion loop,
select Move Geometry to change the length or depth of the loop in the direction of the specified
axis.
After you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another operator.
(For example, Move Geometry stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
To move elements on the 3D model
1. Click Move Geometry to display marker control points at all nodes and tangent points.
On bends, the marker control points display on the far weld-line.
2. Click and drag the cursor to select the nodes to move.
3. Click any of the selected nodes.
The mouse is in move mode. The mouse movement is clamped to either the x, y, or z axis.
4. To change the axis, press Tab or click one of the Axis commands on the Edit Mode
toolbar.
5. Click to specify the new location.
The model geometry is updates.
6. Alternatively, you can type the magnitude of the movement. If you type a single number, the
movement is applied to the currently selected axis. You can move in multiple directions at
once by typing <x-value>, <y-value>, <z-value>.

SECTION 5
S3D/SPR Model View

CAESAR II provides functionality to load Smart 3D (S3D) or SmartPlant Review (SPR)
reference models either partially or in full. You can then rotate and/or filter the loaded S3D/SPR
graphic models to adjust the visibility or isolate specific component classes. This functionality
allows you to interpret the design environment surrounding the piping system and use this
knowledge to readily identify optimal support point and expansion loop locations, judge available
clearances, and so forth. Generally, this functionality provides a more seamless means of
communication across all disciplines involved in the design process when Smart 3D is used as
the overall design platform.
Click S3D/SPR Model in the Reference CAD Models toolbar in the Classic Piping Input
and select one of the following drop-down menu options:
Load S3D/SPR Model
Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model
Dim S3D/SPR Model
S3D/SPR Visibility Options
Load an S3D/SPR Model

To Load a Full Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review model from a VUE or HSF file
1. From the piping input, click S3D/SPR Model .
The software opens the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box.
2. Click Browse and navigate to the location of the VUE or HSF file you want to display and
click Open.
Alternatively, you can type the path name in the field.
3. Select Full Load.
4. Select the degree to rotate the model, if necessary, from the Model Rotation.
The software rotates the model to the angle you specify based on the original angle
of the model when you loaded it.
5. Click Load File to display the graphic file in the CAESAR II 3D Graphics pane.
You can return to the dialog box and select another angle from the Model Rotation.
The software displays the rotation immediately on the 3D graphics pane so that you can
review the rotation before you click Load File.
To Load a Partial Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review model using the Bounding Box
The bounding box functionality allows you to specify which portion of the graphic model to
import into your CAESAR II model.
You can either define the bounding box to the boundaries of the existing CAESAR II model or
select part of the existing CAESAR II model using the Select Group option on the Standard

Operators toolbar. Then, click Draw Cube at the bottom of the dialog box, and adjust as
needed.
1. From the piping input, click S3D/SPR Model .

The software opens the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box.
2. Click Browse and navigate to the location of the VUE or HSF file you want to display and
click Open.
3. Select Partial Load.
Select Re-Import if you need to refresh or change your visibility settings.
4. Select the degree to rotate the model, if necessary, from the Model Rotation.
The software rotates the model to the angle you specify based on the original angle
of the model when you loaded it.
5. Select the Use Model Bounding-Box option.
Alternatively, select elements in the area of interest by drawing a selection window

around them using the Selection Group option in the Standard Operators toolbar. Then,
select Bounding Box from Selection in the Bounding Box Coordinates.
6. Click Draw Cube at the bottom of the dialog box.
You can then resize or pan the cube in all six dimensions (up, down, left, right, front, back)
until you have enclosed all the parts of the graphic model you want to load into a CAESAR II
model.
As shown in the figure above, the bounding box has six markers:
Anchor Marker - Indicates the starting point of the bounding box (shown in red). You
cannot resize the model using this marker.

The three faces to which the anchor marker is connected are fixed (cannot be moved
via any of the markers). You can move the whole bounding box by panning it.
Top Face Marker - Moves the top face (for example, the face that is perpendicular to
top-view-axis of the model, such as Y_Up, Z_Up).
Base Markers - Allows you to re-size the bounding box by selecting any one of three
markers and dragging the mouse.
Base Marker 1 - Moves the rest of the two faces along with Base Marker 3.
Base Marker 2 - Moves these two faces simultaneously.
Base Marker 3 - Moves the rest of the two faces along with Base Marker 1.
Centroid Marker - Sits at the center of the bounding box volume and moves the whole
bounding box from one position to another.
The values for the X, Y, and Z axes display in the Starting Point boxes, depending
on how you manipulate the size and shape of the cube with the graphics markers. The
Starting Point boxes are view-only boxes that are for informational purposes only.
7. Click Load File.
The software loads all components that are inside the bounding box into your model. A
component that originates within the bounding box and extends beyond the boundaries of
the bounding box displays in its entirety. A component that lies completely outside of the
bounding box is totally excluded from the view.
Load S3D/SPR Model Dialog Box

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar of piping input, click S3D/SPR Model .

The Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box displays.
You can load a partial or a full VUE or HSF model. From the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box,
you can specify to rotate the model upon import into CAESAR II, if needed. You can also specify
a bounding box area, which indicates a section of the model that you want to load into CAESAR
II.
Select a File
Select a Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review VUE or a HOOPS Stream File (HSF) file from your
hard drive.
Alternatively, you can type the path name to the location of your graphics file.
Full Load
Select to load the entire S3D or SPR model from the selected VUE file or HSF.
You can select either Full Load or Partial Load as one of the VUE Loading Options.

Partial Load
Select if you want to load a specified portion of the S3D or SPR model from the selected
VUE file or HSF. This option allows you to use the bounding box to specify the section of the
graphic model to load into your CAESAR II model.
You can select either Full Load or Partial Load as one of the VUE Loading Options.
Re-Import
Select to re-import the VUE file or HSF.
Model Rotation
Specifies the degree to which the software rotates a graphics model before loading it into the
current CAESAR II model.
The software rotates the model to the specified angle from its original state. In other
words, if you return to the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box and select a new angle of rotation,
the software rotates based on the original angle in which the model was loaded.
Use Model Bounding Box

Select to use the boundaries of your existing CAESAR II model for the graphic model you
are loading.
Bounding Box from Selection

Select to define a bounding box for a selected part of the graphic model in which you are
loading.
Starting Point X
Displays the values for the X, Y, and Z axes, depending on how you manipulate the size and
shape of the cube with the graphics tools. Starting Point boxes are for informational
purposes only and are not editable.
Starting Point Y

Starting Point Z
Bounding Volume - Width

Specifies the width of the bounding box volume.
Bounding Volume - Height

Specifies the height of the bounding box volume.
Bounding Volume - Depth

Specifies the depth of the bounding box volume.
Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar, click S3D/SPR Model and select Show 3D Model
from the drop-down list.
This option is available if there is a S3D model to display.
Dim S3D/SPR Model

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar, click S3D/SPR Model and select Dim 3D Model
from the drop-down list.
This option is available if there is a S3D model to display.
S3D/SPR Visibility Options

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar, click S3D/SPR Model and select S3D/SPR
Visibility Options from the drop-down list.
This option is available if there is a S3D/SPR model to display. You can then modify the
graphics to display/hide types of components from the S3D/SPR graphic model.

S3D Graphics Environment Dialog Box

Allows you to hide details of the S3D/SPR graphic model that are not needed or could be
distracting while you are working with the model in CAESAR II. For example, if you import a
Smart 3D model using the CAESAR II APCF or PCF import functions and want to reference the
S3D/SPR graphic model for context, the piping elements in the CAESAR II model and the
S3D/SPR graphic reference model can overlap and cause confusion. You can turn off the
display of piping elements from the S3D/SPR Visibility Options, which enables you to compare
the changes more easily.
To Edit S3D/SPR Visibility Options for a loaded VUE file or HSF model:
1. Select S3D/SPR Visibility Options from the S3D/SPR Model drop-down list in the
piping input.
The S3D/SPR Visibility Options dialog box displays.
2. Select a Visibility percentage from 0% to 100% for each of the five categories of
components in a S3D or SPR model.
The Visibility percentage indicates the percentage of light allowed to pass through the
object. For example, a low percentage value indicates the graphics elements are nearly
invisible.
3. Check the corresponding check box(es) to display the elements for a given category or
select the top check box to display all the categories.
The graphic on the loaded model display based on the specified visibility values.
4. Click the Hide/show icon to hide or display the S3D/SPR model graphic.
5. Click the refresh visibility icon to refresh the S3D/SPR model graphic and display the
revised visibility settings.

4 Piping Input Reference

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

4 Piping Input Reference

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

4 Piping Input Reference

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SECTION 4

Piping Input Reference

CAESAR II User's Guide 106

Classic Piping Input Dialog Box

CAESAR II User's Guide 107

Navigating the Classic Piping Input Dialog Box using the

Function Key Destination

F7 Elastic Modulus (c)

Help Screens and Units

CAESAR II User's Guide 108

Double-click >> to display the Edit Node Numbers dialog box.

CAESAR II User's Guide 109

CAESAR II User's Guide 110

CAESAR II User's Guide 111

CAESAR II User's Guide 112

CAESAR II User's Guide 113

DIN Nominal Pipe ODs, in millimeters (file dp.bin)

CAESAR II User's Guide 114

CAESAR II User's Guide 115

CAESAR II User's Guide 116

Double-click >> to display the Edit Operating Conditions dialog box.

CAESAR II User's Guide 117

Access to operating conditions 4 through 9 is granted through the Extended Operating

CAESAR II User's Guide 118

CAESAR II User's Guide 119

CAESAR II User's Guide 120

lateral or angular stiffness.

SIF & Tees

CAESAR II User's Guide 121

CAESAR II User's Guide 122

CAESAR II User's Guide 123

r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe

Code For Tn: For Mean Radius Calculation:

B31.1 Fitting Fitting

B31.3 Fitting Matching Pipe

B31.4 Fitting Matching Pipe

B31.5 Fitting Matching Pipe

B31.8 Fitting Matching Pipe

B31.8 Ch VIII Fitting Matching Pipe

SECT III NC Fitting Matching Pipe

SECT III ND Fitting Matching Pipe

Z662 Matching Pipe Matching Pipe

NAVY 505 Fitting Fitting

B31.1 (1967) Fitting Fitting

SWEDISH Fitting Matching Pipe

BS 806 N/A N/A

STOOMWEZEN N/A N/A

RCC-M C/D Matching Matching Pipe

CODETI Fitting Fitting

NORWEGIAN Fitting Fitting

FDBR Fitting Fitting

BS 7159 Fitting Fitting

CAESAR II User's Guide 124

UKOOA Fitting Fitting

IGE/TD/12 Fitting Fitting

EN-13480 Fitting Matching Pipe

GPTC/Z380 Fitting Matching Pipe

CAESAR II User's Guide 125

CAESAR II User's Guide 126